Upload
others
View
1
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
AN5006-20
Small-Sized Integrated AccessDevice
MSAN Configuration Guide
Version: B/1
Code: MN000001806
FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
April 2015
Thank you for choosing our products.
We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.
We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.
Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China
Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhomegroup.com
Legal Notice
are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.
(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
All rights reserved
No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Preface
Related Documentation
Document Description
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device
Product Description
Introduces the AN5006-20’s network location, functional
features, hardware structure, application model, equipment
configuration, network management system and technical
specifications.
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device
Hardware Description
Introduces the appearance, structure, functions, technical
specifications, and operation of the AN5006-20’s cabinet,
PDP, subrack, cards, cables and wires, so as to facilitate
users’ mastery of the hardware features of the equipment.
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device
Installation Guide
Introduces the overall installation and acceptance
inspection procedures from unpacking inspection to power-
on test after the AN5006-20 is delivered to the construction
site, and provides reference information (e.g. safety
principles and wiring scheme of a variety of interfaces) to
guide users to install the equipment.
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device Quick
Installation Guide
Introduces how to install the AN5006-20 and how to
connect and lay out wires and cables for it using
illustrations.
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device MSAN
Configuration Guide
Introduces the method for configuring the MSAN services
supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.
I
Document Description
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device EPON
Configuration Guide
Introduces the method for configuring the EPON services
supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.
AN5006-20 Small-Sized
Integrated Access Device GPON
Configuration Guide
Introduces the method for configuring the GPON services
supported by the AN5006-20 via the UNM2000, such as
basic configuration, voice service configuration, data
service configuration, multicast service configuration, and
software upgrading configuration, to guide users on start-
up of various services and software upgrading.
II
Version
Version Description
A Initial version
B
Corresponds to Version 3.1 of the AN5006-20.
The corresponding UNM2000 version is
V1.0R1 Build13.08.01.02.
Intended Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
u Planning and designing engineers
u Commissioning engineers
u Operation and maintenance engineers
To utilize this manual, these prerequisite skills are necessary:
u xDSL access principle
u Ethernet switching technology
u Computer network technology
u Internet Protocol
u V5 Protocol
u PON technology
III
Conventions
Terminology Conventions
Terminology Convention
AN5006-20FiberHome AN5006-20 Small-sized Integrated Access
Device
UNM2000FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management
System
MCU-EPON Manage Control Card
MCU-GPON Manage Control Card
MCU-EPON2 Manage Control Card
MCU-GPON2 Manage Control Card
MCUA Manage Control Card
MCUB Manage Control Card
MCUC Manage Control Card
MCUD Manage Control Card
AD32 32 Lines ADSL2+ Card
AD64 64 Lines ADSL2+ Card
CASA 32 Ports ADSL2+ and POTS Combo Board
VD32 32 Lines VDSL Card
POTS32 32 Ports POTS Card
POTS 64 Ports POTS Card
HD32A 32-port SHDSL Interfacing Card
HDT8A High Bit Rate Digital TDM 8A Card
HDT8B High bit rate Digital TDM 8B
PWRB Power Card (Type B)
FANB Fan Unit
HCU-20 Environment monitoring device
IV
Symbol Conventions
Symbol Convention Description
Note Important features or operation guide.
CautionPossible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic
interruption or loss.
Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.
î Jump Jumps to another step.
íCascading
menuConnects multi-level menu options.
îBidirectional
serviceThe service signal is bidirectional.
íUnidirectional
serviceThe service signal is unidirectional.
V
Contents
Preface...................................................................................................................I
Related Documentation ...................................................................................I
Version ..........................................................................................................III
Intended Readers ..........................................................................................III
Conventions ................................................................................................. IV
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel.........................................1-1
1.1 Logging into the Console ...............................................................1-2
1.1.1 First-time Login to the Console.........................................1-2
1.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console.....................................1-5
1.2 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel...........................1-6
1.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................1-6
1.2.2 Network Diagram.............................................................1-7
1.2.3 Planning Data..................................................................1-8
1.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................1-12
1.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN ...............................1-13
1.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN..........................................1-13
1.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing........................................1-13
1.2.8 Configuration Result ......................................................1-14
1.3 Logging into the UNM2000...........................................................1-14
2 Adding Equipment .......................................................................................2-1
2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................................2-2
2.2 Configuration Flow.........................................................................2-2
2.3 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-3
2.4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-5
2.5 Adding Cards.................................................................................2-7
2.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically .............................................2-7
2.5.2 Adding Cards Manually ....................................................2-9
2.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-10
2.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-11
2.8 Synchronizing Time .....................................................................2-12
2.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-13
3 Configuring Voice Services ..........................................................................3-1
3.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248 .......................3-2
3.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................3-2
3.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................3-2
3.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................3-3
3.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................3-8
3.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port...................................................3-9
3.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-11
3.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-12
3.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform
Parameters....................................................................3-13
3.1.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress ...................................3-13
3.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-14
3.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ............................3-15
3.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-15
3.1.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-16
3.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status............................3-16
3.1.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status ..............................3-17
3.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-18
3.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-19
3.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP.........................3-20
3.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................3-20
3.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................3-20
3.2.3 Planning Data................................................................3-21
3.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-27
3.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port.................................................3-28
3.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................3-30
3.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN...........................................3-31
3.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server.............................................3-32
3.2.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress ...................................3-33
3.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ..............................3-33
3.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .........................................3-34
3.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port..............................................3-35
3.2.13 Configuration End ..........................................................3-36
3.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status............................3-36
3.2.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status ..............................3-37
3.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status.................................3-37
3.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status...............................3-38
3.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service................................3-39
3.3.1 Configuration Rule .........................................................3-40
3.3.2 Network Diagram...........................................................3-41
3.3.3 Planning Data................................................................3-42
3.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................3-46
3.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1.3-46
3.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 .3-52
3.3.7 Configuration Result ......................................................3-57
3.4 Common Configuration ................................................................3-59
3.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters........................3-59
3.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer ...........................................3-60
3.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile ...........................................3-60
3.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters ..........................................3-61
3.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number........................3-62
3.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number...........................................3-62
3.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.......3-63
3.4.8 2833 Configuration ........................................................3-64
3.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration..................................................3-64
3.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication ...........................3-65
3.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing
Parameters....................................................................3-65
3.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ..........................3-66
3.6 SIP Configuration.........................................................................3-67
3.6.1 SIPAdvanced Configuration ..........................................3-67
3.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ..............................3-68
3.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-68
3.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User ....................................3-69
3.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information .......................................3-70
3.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ....3-70
3.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ............................3-70
3.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port...3-71
3.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information.....................3-72
4 Configuring Data Services ...........................................................................4-1
4.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent
Mode.............................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................4-2
4.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................4-2
4.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................4-3
4.1.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-10
4.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-12
4.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-12
4.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-13
4.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-14
4.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-15
4.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-16
4.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-17
4.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-19
4.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-22
4.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-24
4.1.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-26
4.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode ......4-26
4.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-26
4.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-26
4.2.3 Planning Data................................................................4-27
4.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-33
4.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-35
4.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile ..................................4-35
4.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile..................4-36
4.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................4-37
4.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile ...........................4-38
4.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-40
4.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-41
4.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-41
4.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................4-45
4.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................4-47
4.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................4-48
4.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-48
4.3.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-48
4.3.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-49
4.3.3 Planning Data................................................................4-50
4.3.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-56
4.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-58
4.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-58
4.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-59
4.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-60
4.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-61
4.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-62
4.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-63
4.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-64
4.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-67
4.3.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-68
4.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-69
4.4.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................4-69
4.4.2 Network Diagram...........................................................4-70
4.4.3 Planning Data................................................................4-70
4.4.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................4-76
4.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................4-77
4.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile.........................4-77
4.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile ........4-78
4.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile .............................4-79
4.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile.............4-80
4.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................4-81
4.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ..............4-82
4.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................4-83
4.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................4-84
4.4.14 Configuration Result ......................................................4-85
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service................................................................5-1
5.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM ........5-2
5.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................5-2
5.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................5-2
5.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................5-3
5.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................5-9
5.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes .............................5-11
5.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port................................................5-11
5.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC ...................................................5-13
5.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................5-15
5.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-15
5.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-16
5.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile ...........................................5-18
5.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile ........................5-18
5.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile .......................5-20
5.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile ...........5-21
5.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port Bound
Group ............................................................................5-23
5.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................5-23
5.1.17 Configuration Result ......................................................5-27
5.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local
Mode)..........................................................................................5-27
5.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................5-27
5.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................5-28
5.2.3 Planning Data................................................................5-29
5.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................5-30
5.2.5 Configuring E1 Data.......................................................5-31
5.2.6 Configuring Clock ..........................................................5-32
5.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port...............................................5-33
5.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile.................................5-35
5.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile.............5-35
5.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................5-37
6 Configuring the Multicast Service .................................................................6-1
6.1 Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the
Proxy Mode ...................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................6-2
6.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................6-2
6.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................6-6
6.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression....6-6
6.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...............................6-7
6.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ........................................6-8
6.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress ......................6-9
6.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..................................6-9
6.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-10
6.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port .................................................6-14
6.1.12 Configuration Result ......................................................6-16
6.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the
Controllable Mode........................................................................6-19
6.2.1 Configuration Rules .......................................................6-19
6.2.2 Network Diagram...........................................................6-19
6.2.3 Planning Data................................................................6-20
6.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................6-24
6.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..6-24
6.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................6-25
6.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode ......................................6-26
6.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress ....................6-27
6.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN..........................6-27
6.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile .....................................6-28
6.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ........................6-29
6.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters ...........................6-30
6.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN.................................6-31
6.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports ...............................................6-34
6.2.15 Configuration Result ......................................................6-35
7 Card Software Upgrade ...............................................................................7-1
7.1 Precautions ...................................................................................7-2
7.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-2
7.2.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Planning Data..................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-4
7.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..............................7-4
7.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File.........................7-5
7.2.6 Backing up the System Software......................................7-6
7.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software..........7-6
7.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card..........................7-7
7.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control
Card ................................................................................7-7
7.3 Upgrading the Line Card ................................................................7-8
7.3.1 Upgrade Rules.................................................................7-8
7.3.2 Planning Data..................................................................7-9
7.3.3 Upgrade Flow ..................................................................7-9
7.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software.................7-10
7.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card.................................7-11
7.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface
Card ..............................................................................7-11
7.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-12
7.4.1 Upgrade Rule ................................................................7-12
7.4.2 Planning Data................................................................7-12
7.4.3 Upgrade Flow ................................................................7-12
7.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card...........7-13
7.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card ............7-13
7.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink
Subcard.........................................................................7-14
8 Configuring Link Aggregation .......................................................................8-1
8.1 Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode......................8-2
8.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-2
8.1.2 Network Diagram.............................................................8-2
8.1.3 Planning Data..................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Configuration Flow...........................................................8-5
8.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ................................................................................8-5
8.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode ...................................8-6
8.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports....................................8-6
8.1.8 Configuration Result ........................................................8-7
8.2 Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode...............8-7
8.2.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................8-7
8.2.2 Network Diagram.............................................................8-8
8.2.3 Planning Data..................................................................8-9
8.2.4 Configuration Flow.........................................................8-10
8.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the Management Control
Card ..............................................................................8-11
8.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ............................8-12
8.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ..........................8-13
8.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode .................................8-13
8.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports..................................8-14
8.2.10 Configuration Result ......................................................8-15
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring......................................9-1
9.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring...............................................9-2
9.1.1 Configuration Rules .........................................................9-2
9.1.2 Planning Data..................................................................9-4
9.1.3 Configuration Flow...........................................................9-7
9.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile .....................................9-7
9.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile ...........................................9-8
9.1.6 Configuration End ............................................................9-9
9.2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters ......................9-9
9.3 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-11
9.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12
9.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-12
9.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card...................9-13
9.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card ................................9-14
9.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card .............................9-15
10 Test Function .............................................................................................10-1
10.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test ........................................................10-2
10.1.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-2
10.1.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-3
10.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test..................10-3
10.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ..........10-4
10.1.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-4
10.2 Subscriber External Line Test.......................................................10-5
10.2.1 Test Rules .....................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Signal Flow....................................................................10-5
10.2.3 Test Procedure ..............................................................10-6
10.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ................10-6
10.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .........10-7
10.2.6 Test Completed..............................................................10-8
10.3 Ping Test .....................................................................................10-9
10.3.1 Test Purpose .................................................................10-9
10.3.2 Ping Test .......................................................................10-9
10.3.3 Viewing the Test Result ................................................10-11
Appendix A FTP Operation Guide .............................................................. A-1
A.1 Function Overview ........................................................................ A-1
A.2 Procedure..................................................................................... A-1
Figures
Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram....................................................1-8
Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel ......1-12
Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment.......................................................2-3
Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain ..........................................................2-4
Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed ..............................................2-5
Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE .................................................................2-6
Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed ..............................................2-7
Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection .....................................2-8
Figure 2-7 The Subrack View..........................................................................2-8
Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)...............................................2-9
Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually ................................................................2-10
Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address .............................2-11
Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System ............................................2-12
Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time.........................................................2-13
Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash ..........................................2-14
Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service ................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service...........................................................3-9
Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-10
Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-11
Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-12
Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-12
Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters ......3-13
Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IPAddress .................................................3-14
Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-14
Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile ..........................................3-15
Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-16
Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status..........................................3-17
Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status..........................................3-18
Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-18
Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-19
Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service ..................................3-21
Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service ............................................................3-28
Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner ................................................3-29
Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed) ...........................................3-30
Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................3-31
Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN.........................................................3-32
Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server...........................................................3-32
Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IPAddress .................................................3-33
Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters ............................................3-34
Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap .......................................................3-35
Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port............................................................3-35
Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status..........................................3-36
Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status..........................................3-37
Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status...............................................3-38
Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status.............................................3-39
Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services .................................................3-41
Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service ......................................3-46
Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name................................................3-47
Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..................................3-48
Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data ................................................................3-48
Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data.....................................................................3-49
Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data.........................................................3-50
Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data.................................................................3-50
Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)..........3-51
Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side) ...3-52
Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data..................................................3-53
Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..................................3-53
Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock ........................................................................3-54
Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data..............................................3-55
Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side) ..........3-56
Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side) ....3-57
Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status .....................................................................3-58
Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status .................................................................3-58
Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters......................................3-59
Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer .........................................................3-60
Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile .........................................................3-61
Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters ........................................................3-61
Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number......................................3-62
Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number.........................................................3-63
Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone.....................3-64
Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833 .........................................................................3-64
Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication .........................................3-65
Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters ......3-66
Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode ........................................3-66
Figure 3-60 SIPAdvanced Configuration ........................................................3-67
Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile ............................................3-68
Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC ............................................3-69
Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users...................................3-69
Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet ..................3-70
Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information ..........................................3-71
Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port.................3-72
Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information...................................3-73
Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode........................................................................4-3
Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode...4-11
Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-12
Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-13
Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-14
Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).........................4-14
Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-15
Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Transparent Transmission Mode.........................................4-16
Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................4-17
Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-18
Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................4-18
Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-19
Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-20
Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-21
Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-22
Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................4-23
Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)..................................................4-23
Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-25
Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent
Mode...........................................................................................4-25
Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode ......4-27
Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag
Mode...........................................................................................4-34
Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-35
Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode...........................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner ......................4-37
Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in
the Tag Mode (Completed)...........................................................4-37
Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode...........................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode (Completed).................................................................4-40
Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Tag Mode ....................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service
in the Tag Mode ...........................................................................4-41
Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................4-42
Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-43
Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL
Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode ............................4-44
Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode4-45
Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode.....4-46
Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed).................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag
Mode...........................................................................................4-47
Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode...........................................................................................4-48
Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-49
Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-57
Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-58
Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-59
Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in
the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed)..........................................4-60
Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-61
Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-62
Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
1:1 Translation Mode ...................................................................4-63
Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Completed) ......................................4-63
Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode ............................4-64
Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................4-65
Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-66
Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-67
Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-68
Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-68
Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-70
Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-76
Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................4-77
Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-78
Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL
Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed) .........................4-79
Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-80
Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-81
Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode...................................................................4-82
Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service
in the N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)......................................4-83
Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1
Translation Mode .........................................................................4-84
Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode (Completed) .......................................................................4-85
Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode.............................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode5-10
Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-11
Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-12
Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode (Completed)....................................................5-13
Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL
Service Configuration...................................................................5-14
Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode
(Completed).................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-15
Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode................................................................5-16
Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode..........................................5-17
Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode (Completed) ......................5-17
Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode........................................................................5-18
Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-19
Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).................5-20
Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in
the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode.....................................5-21
Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-22
Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed).5-22
Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.
SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ........5-23
Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ..........................................5-24
Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................5-25
Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode ....................5-26
Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL
Service in the ATM Transparent Mode..........................................5-27
Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode...........................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-31
Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-32
Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode......................................................................5-33
Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode ..................................................5-34
Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) ..............................5-34
Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode..........................................5-35
Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-36
Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL
Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed) 5-37
Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode .................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode ............................................6-6
Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression..................6-7
Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN .............................................6-7
Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode...............................................6-8
Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Proxy Mode........6-9
Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN..............................................6-10
Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode...............6-11
Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-12
Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy
Mode...........................................................................................6-13
Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy
Mode...........................................................................................6-14
Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner....................6-15
Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed ...................6-15
Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information .................................6-16
Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy
Mode...........................................................................................6-17
Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode...........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy
Mode...........................................................................................6-18
Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode......6-20
Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode ...................................6-24
Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression................6-25
Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN ...........................................6-26
Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode.................................6-26
Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Controllable
Mode...........................................................................................6-27
Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode .......6-28
Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile ...................................................6-29
Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters ......................................6-30
Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters .........................................6-30
Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode ......................................6-31
Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data................6-32
Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable
Mode...........................................................................................6-33
Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable
Mode...........................................................................................6-34
Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)..........................................6-35
Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal
User ............................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview
User ............................................................................................6-36
Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the
Controllable Mode........................................................................6-37
Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled
Mode...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable
Mode...........................................................................................6-38
Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card ..........................7-4
Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash ..........................................7-5
Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data.....................................7-6
Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software....................................................7-6
Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card ......................................7-7
Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card........................................7-7
Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card....7-8
Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software ............7-10
Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch
Manner........................................................................................7-10
Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card...............................................7-11
Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card ..........7-11
Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.............7-13
Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-13
Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card.........................7-14
Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard.....7-14
Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram ...........................................8-3
Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation ........................................8-5
Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -
Manual Aggregation.......................................................................8-6
Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation .....................8-6
Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation......................8-7
Figure 8-6 Static LACPAggregation Network Diagram ....................................8-8
Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACPAggregation ............................8-11
Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card -
Static LACPAggregation..............................................................8-12
Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters ..........................................8-12
Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters ........................................8-13
Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACPAggregation ............8-14
Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACPAggregation.............8-14
Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance............................9-7
Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ..............9-8
Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile ....................9-8
Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters..........................9-11
Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode....................................................9-12
Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card .........................................................9-12
Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module.......................................................9-13
Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card .....................9-14
Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card................................9-14
Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card................................9-15
Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test............................10-2
Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-3
Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test .....................................10-4
Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result ........................10-4
Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test...........................10-5
Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test...........................................10-6
Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test ..............................10-7
Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result .......................10-8
Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters ........................................10-10
Figure 10-10 Ping Test ...................................................................................10-11
Figure A-1 Opening the WFTP Software......................................................... A-1
Figure A-2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI .......................................... A-2
Figure A-3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1 ................. A-2
Figure A-4 Entering User Password 1............................................................. A-3
Figure A-5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package........... A-3
Figure A-6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool................................... A-4
Figure A-7 Logging Options ........................................................................... A-4
Tables
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management
Channel.........................................................................................1-8
Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment......................................2-9
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service .....................................3-3
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service .......................................3-21
Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1
Side.............................................................................................3-42
Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side3-44
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode.............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode....................4-27
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-50
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation
Mode...........................................................................................4-71
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode........................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Mode...........................................................................................5-29
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode.....................6-3
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode............6-20
Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card ...........7-3
Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type.......7-8
Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software .....7-9
Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA
Card ............................................................................................7-12
Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode...................................8-4
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode............................8-9
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold
Parameters and Alarm Clearing Threshold Parameters ..................9-2
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Instance ........................................................................................9-4
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring
Parameters....................................................................................9-9
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters.................................................................10-10
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result.........................................................................10-11
11 Configuring the UNM2000Management Channel
Before using the UNM2000 to manage the AN5006-20, users need to configure the
UNM2000 management channel via the Console control platform (abbreviated as
Console in the following). The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000
management channel.
Logging into the Console
Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
Logging into the UNM2000
Version: B/1 1-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
1.11.1 Logging into the Console
The following introduces how to log into the Console.
1.1.11.1.1 First-time Login to the Console
Log into the Console through the Window’s Hyper Terminal to access the CLI
network management system for the equipment.
Prerequisite
u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.
u The network management computer has been started normally.
u The equipment is powered on normally.
u The user name and password for logging in the CLI network management
system for the AN5006-20 are available.
Procedure
1. Click the Start menu on the desktop, and select All ProgramsíAccessories
íTelecomíHyper Terminal to bring up the Connection Description dialog
box.
Note:
The Windows XP operating system is used as an example here.
2. In the Connection Description dialog box, configure the parameters as
follows:
4 Name: Fill in the name of a connection object, e.g. FiberHome CLI
Control Terminal.
4 Icon: Select an icon for this connection.
1-2 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
Click OK, and the Connect To dialog box appears.
3. Select the COM1 port of the Console interface on the management control card
in the drop-down list of the Connect using field in the Connect To dialog box.
Click OK, and the COM1 Properties dialog box appears.
4. In the COM1 Properties dialog box, click the Restore Defaults button. The
default configurations are as below:
4 Bits per second: 9600
4 Data bits: 8
4 Parity: None
4 Stop bits: 1
Version: B/1 1-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4 Flow control: None
Click OK to start up the Console.
5. Press the <ENTER> key, and enter the user name and the password to log into
the CLI network management system. The commands are as follows:Login:GEPON
// The default user is common user, and the user name is GEPON.
Password:*****
// The initial password is GEPON.
User>enable
1-4 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
// In the read-only mode, use the enable command to enter the management mode.
Password:*****
// The initial password of the administrator account is GEPON.
Admin#
// After the prompt Admin⇤appears, you can enter command lines to perform network management
operations on the AN5006-20.
Note:
u If the command prompt is User>, the system is in the common user
mode; if the command prompt is Admin#, the system is in the
administrator mode.
u The user name is case insensitive, while the password should be
capitalized.
Caution:
To enhance the security of the system, users should memorize their
passwords and keep them secret. Regularly changing passwords is
strongly recommended.
6. Select FileíSave from the menu bar of the Console window to save the
configurations for the Console.
1.1.21.1.2 Subsequent Login to the Console
After establishing the Console for the AN5006-20 CLI network management system
in their first login, users can directly access the Console via the CLI network
management system the next time.
Prerequisite
u The network management computer has been connected with the equipment
by the Console cable.
u The network management computer has been started normally.
u The equipment is powered on normally.
Version: B/1 1-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
u The Console for the AN5006-20's CLI network management system has been
set up (the following takes the FiberHome CLI Control Terminal as an
example).
Procedure
1. Select StartíProgramíAccessoriesíTelecomíHyperTerminalí
FiberHome CLI Control Terminal from the desktop to bring up the Telnet
default? alert box.
4 Click Yes, the Hyper Terminal will be used as the default Telnet program;
4 Click No, the Hyper Terminal will not be used as the default Telnet
program.
Enter the established Console.
Note:
To set up a shortcut for convenience, drag and drop FiberHome CLI
Control Terminal to the desktop.
1.21.2 Configuring the UNM2000 ManagementChannel
The following introduces how to configure the UNM2000 management channel.
1.2.11.2.1 Configuration Rules
The rules for configuring the UNM2000 management channel are described as
follows:
u The MCUA card is required for the equipment to perform the MSAN uplink.
u The equipment can support up to four management VLANs, thus the user can
manage the equipment even in a complex network.
1-6 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
u When configuring the UNM2000 management channel, if the IP address of the
UNM2000 client end and the equipment management IP address are not in the
same network segment, users should configure the static routing to perform
routing and forwarding.
u While configuring the static routing, users need to configure the IP address and
mask of the destination network segment and the gateway address of the next-
hop routing.
u The management VLAN and IP address are only valid in the equipment CPU.
Users need to configure the corresponding uplink service VLAN for the
management port.
u If the VLAN tag processing mode is set to untag, the port default VLAN should
be configured.
u QinQ management VLANs are supported to provide users with double-layer
management channels.
1.2.21.2.2 Network Diagram
The UNM2000 client end manages the equipment via the equipment’s uplink ports.
The management is implemented in two ways: management based on LAN and
management via gateway. In this example, the client end performs remote
management of the AN5006-20 via the network gateway, and the AN5006-20 uses
the MCUA card. See Figure 1-1 for the network diagram of the UNM2000.
Version: B/1 1-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 1-1 The UNM2000 Network Diagram
1.2.31.2.3 Planning Data
Table 1-1 lists the planning data for configuring the UNM2000 management
channel for the AN5006-20.
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example
Configuring the
Management VLAN
manage vlan ipv4
name <vlanname>
Management VLAN
name
Designate the service name
for the current configuration
item. Set the value to a
character string that contains
no more than 16 bytes.
Compulsory.
mngvlan
svlan tpid
<tpid>
SVLAN Tag protocol
identifier
The protocol type in the outer
or single VLAN tag. The
default setting is 33024
(0x8100).
This parameter is compulsory.
33024
1-8 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)
Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example
cos <cos> SVLAN priority
The priority of the outer or
single VLAN tag. The value
ranges from 0 to 7.
Compulsory.
7
vid <value> SVLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the outer or
single VLAN tag. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095.
This parameter is compulsory.
1
{[cvlan] tpid
<tpid> cos <cos>
vid <value>}*1
CVLAN Tag protocol
identifier
The protocol type in the inner
VLAN tag. The default setting
is 33024 (0x8100).
Optional. Configured when the
management VLAN is double-
tagged.
-
CVLAN priority
The priority of the inner VLAN
tag. The value ranges from 0
to 7.
Compulsory. Configure this
item when the management
VLAN is double-tagged.
-
CVLAN ID
The VLAN ID of the inner
VLAN tag. The value ranges
from 1 to 4095.
Compulsory. Configure this
item when the management
VLAN is double-tagged.
-
ip <A.B.C.D>Management IP
address
The valid IPv4 address in
dotted decimal notation.
Compulsory.
10.98.20.
20
mask <A.B.C.D>Management IP
mask
The valid IPv4 address in
dotted decimal notation.
Compulsory.
255.255.0.
0
{[gateway] <A.B.
C.D>}*1Default gateway
In the same network segment
with an existed IP address of
the equipment.
Optional.
-
Version: B/1 1-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)
Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example
{[pontype] [pon|
dpon]}*1
Identifying the uplink
PON port type
It is valid when the OLT
delivers the management
VLAN to the AN5006-20.
Optional.
-
Adding the uplink
service VLAN
uplink vlan {id
<id>}*1
Uplink VLAN service
ID
Optional. The system
automatically assigns the ID
when the parameter is not
configured.
-
<name>Uplink VLAN service
name
Designate the service name
for the current configuration
item. Set the value to a
character string that contains
no more than 30 bytes.
Compulsory.
mngvlan
start <startVid> Starting VLAN ID
The starting ID value of the
management VLAN
Compulsory.
1
end <endVid> Ending VLAN ID
The ending ID value of the
management VLAN
Compulsory.
1
1-10 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)
Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example
[tag|untag]The tag processing
mode
The mode of processing the
VLAN tag. Defines whether to
strip the VLAN tag from the
control message transmitted
from the management control
card port. The options include
tag and untag.
u Select the untag mode
when no other equipment
which can strip the VLAN
tag exists between the PC
and the AN5006-20 (for
example, when the PC is
directly connected with
the equipment or via the
HUB).
u Select the tag mode when
any other equipment
which can strip the VLAN
tag exist between the PC
and the AN5006-20.
Compulsory.
tag
[portno|
trunkid]
Uplink VLAN
associated port type
The options include port
(general port) and trunk (link
aggregation group).
Compulsory.
portno
<ifStr>
Port number or link
aggregation group
number
The port number ranges from
1 to 4, and the link aggregation
group number should be set to
1.
This parameter can be typed
in one of the three forms as
below:
u A single port: portno 5/1;
u Multiple ports: portno 5/
1,3;
u Port range: portno 5/1-3.
5 indicates the slot number of
the management control card.
This parameter is compulsory.
5/1
Version: B/1 1-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 1-1 Planning Data for Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel (Continued)
Procedure Parameter Meaning Description Example
Configuring the static
routing
add static route
ipv4 destination
<A.B.C.D>
Destination network
IP address
The IP address of network
containing the network
management server. The valid
IPv4 address in dotted decimal
notation.
Compulsory.
10.78.20.
122
gateway <A.B.C.
D>Gateway IPAddress
The gateway IP address of the
network segment where the
equipment is located. The
valid IPv4 address in dotted
decimal notation.
Compulsory.
10.98.1.
254
mask <A.B.C.D>Gateway subnet
mask
The gateway subnet mask of
the segment where the
equipment is located. The
valid IPv4 address in dotted
decimal notation.
Compulsory.
255.255.0.
0
1.2.41.2.4 Configuration Flow
The flow of configuring the UNM2000 management channel is shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 The Flow of Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
1-12 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
1.2.51.2.5 Configuring the Management VLAN
Command Format
Command
cd vlan
add manage vlan ipv4 name <vlanname> svlan tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>
{[cvlan] tpid <tpid> cos <cos> vid <value>}*1 ip <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>
{[gateway] <A.B.C.D>}*1 {[pontype] [pon/dpon]}*1
Configuration Procedure
1. Access the vlan directory.Admin#cd vlan
Admin\vlan#
2. Create the management VLAN.Admin\vlan#add manage vlan ipv4 name mngvlan svlan tpid 33024 cos 7 vid 1 ip
10.98.20.20 mask 255.255.0.0
Admin\vlan#
1.2.61.2.6 Adding Uplink Service VLAN
Command Format
Command
add uplink vlan {id <id>}*1 <name> start <startVid> end <endVid> [tag|
untag] [portno|trunk] <port>
Configuration Procedure
1. Add the uplink service VLAN.Admin\vlan#add uplink vlan mngvlan start 1 end 1 tag portno 5/1
Admin\vlan#
1.2.71.2.7 Configuring the Static Routing
Command Format
Command
cd ..
cd device
Version: B/1 1-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Command
add static route ipv4 designated <A.B.C.D> gateway <A.B.C.D> mask <A.B.C.D>
save
Configuration Procedure
1. Switch the vlan directory to the device directory.Admin\vlan#cd ..
Admin#cd device
Admin\device#
2. Configure the static routings.Admin\device#add static route ipv4 designated 10.78.20.122 gateway 10.98.1.254 mask
255.255.0.0
Admin\device#
3. Save configuration.Admin\device#cd ..
Admin\#save
Save Config ... OK.
Admin\#
1.2.81.2.8 Configuration Result
The configuration of the UNM2000 management channel is completed after the
aforesaid steps. Users can manage and maintain the AN5006-20 by logging into the
UNM2000 on the network management computer.
1.31.3 Logging into the UNM2000
Prerequisites
u JRE1.6.0 has been installed.
u The server end is running normally.
u The communication between the server end and client end is normal.
Procedure
1. Double-click the browser icon, enter http://server end IP address:port
number/webstart/ (for example, http://10.98.20.53:8080/webstart/) in the
1-14 Version: B/1
1 Configuring the UNM2000 Management Channel
address field of the browser, and press Enter to access the page for installing
the UNM2000 client end.
Note:
The port number refers to the Tomcat access port number that users set
when installing the server end.
2. Click UNM2000 client end to bring up the alert box as shown below to perform
download validation and installation of the client end software.
3. Enter the username and password (both are admin by default) in the Log into
UNM2000 dialog box that appears. Fill in the IP address of the corresponding
server in Server and click Log in.
Version: B/1 1-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Note:
If you log in the UNM2000 successfully, the server end and client end
have both been installed correctly.
1-16 Version: B/1
22 Adding Equipment
After logging into the UNM2000, users need to add the to-be-managed AN5006-20
to a logical domain so as to manage and maintain it. The following introduces the
steps for adding equipment.
Configuration Rules
Configuration Flow
Creating the Logical Domain
Creating the Access NE
Adding Cards
Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address
Configuring the SNMP Time System
Synchronizing Time
Saving Current Configuration to Flash
Version: B/1 2-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2.12.1 Configuration Rules
u If the LAN network management mode is used, the IP address of the system
should be consistent with the equipment IP address set for the in-band
management VLAN, so that the network management server can communicate
normally with the AN5006-20. For example, if the equipment IP address set for
the management VLAN is 10.98.20.20, the IP address of the system should
also be set to 10.98.20.20.
u When the network management computer and the equipment are not in the
same LAN, users need to manage the equipment through a gateway. In such
case, the IP address of the system and the gateway IP address of the
equipment set for the management VLAN should be in the same network
segment, so that the network management computer can access and manage
the AN5006-20 through the gateway. For example, if the gateway IP address of
the equipment set in the management VLAN is 10.98.x.x (the subnet mask is
255.255.0.0), the IP address of the system should also be set to 10.98.x.x (the
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, and must be different from the IP address of the
gateway).
2.22.2 Configuration Flow
See Figure 2-1 for the flow of adding equipment.
2-2 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
Figure 2-1 The Flow of Adding Equipment
2.32.3 Creating the Logical Domain
Divide the management objects by creating the corresponding logical domains
according to the requirements of the operators to enable management based on
authorization and domain.
Procedure
1. Right-click a blank area of the Main Topology pane and select Create Logical
Domain from the shortcut menu to bring up the Create Global Logical
Domain dialog box.
Version: B/1 2-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 2-2 Creating the Logical Domain
2. Enter the desired name in the Logical Domain Name field. Alias Name and
Remark are optional items.
3. Click OK to save the settings and create a new logical domain.
2-4 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
Figure 2-3 Logical Domain Creation Completed
2.42.4 Creating the Access NE
Add the AN5006-20 module to the UNM2000.
Procedure
1. Right-click the created logical domain and select Create NEíCreate access
NE... from the shortcut menu.
2. Configure the parameters in the Create Access NE dialog box. See Figure 2-4.
Version: B/1 2-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 2-4 Creating the Access NE
3. Click OK and the newly created access NE will appear in the main topology, as
illustrated in Figure 2-5.
2-6 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
Figure 2-5 The Access NE Creation Completed
2.52.5 Adding Cards
Two ways of adding a card exist: automatic adding and manual adding.
u Automatic adding: You can use the function of detecting physical configuration
to add a card automatically if it is present.
u Manual adding: Users can pre-configure to add a card if it is not present. The
manual adding is also available if the card is present.
2.5.12.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically
The cards can be automatically added to the slots through automatic detection of
the current physical configuration of the AN5006-20.
Version: B/1 2-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Procedure
1. Right-click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane and select
Detect Physical Configuration from the shortcut menu to open the Detect
Physical Configuration tab.
2. Select the desired synchronization mode.
3. Click the Detect Physical Configuration (D) button and wait until the detection
is completed, as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Result of Physical Configuration Detection
4. Click the Synchronize All button and click OK when the Synchronize
Operation Succeed. message appears to complete adding the card
automatically.
5. Double-click the NE in the Main Topology pane to open the NE manager and
check the current card configuration, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 The Subrack View
2-8 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
2.5.22.5.2 Adding Cards Manually
Slot Distribution
After adding the AN5006-20 module, click this module in the Device Tree. and its
subrack view will appear in the right pane, as shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 The Subrack View (No Card Added)
The cards that can be configured in the AN5006-20 subrack view are listed in
Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 The Card Configuration for the Equipment
Card Name Applicable Slot Quantity
AD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
AD64 1 to 4 0 to 4
CASA 1 to 4 0 to 4
VD32 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS32 1 to 4 0 to 4
POTS 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8A 1 to 4 0 to 4
HDT8B 1 to 4 0 to 4
HD32A 1 to 4 0 to 4
MCUA / MCUB 5 1
PWRB 6 1
FANB 7 1
HCU-20 801 0 to 1
Version: B/1 2-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Procedure
Add the AD64 card in Slot 1 manually in the subrack view. See below for the
operation procedures:
1. Right-click the slot to be added with a card, and select Add Card from the
shortcut menu. Then select the desired card type from the submenu that
appears subsequently.
Figure 2-9 Adding Cards Manually
Modifying Cards
u Right-click the card to be modified in the subrack view, and select Attribute
from the shortcut menu that appears. Then modify the card attributes in the
dialog box that appears.
u Right-click the card to be deleted in the subrack view, and select Delete Card
from the shortcut menu. The card will then be deleted.
u Right-click the card to be replaced in the subrack view, and select Replace
Card from the shortcut menu. Then select the new card type in the submenu.
After replacing the card, reconfigure parameters for the new card or use the
system default configurations.
2.62.6 Configuring the SNMP Trap ReceiverAddress
Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address, and then the system will send the Trap
message to the address.
2-10 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Common ConfigíSNMP TRAP Receiver IP from the Operational
Tree pane to bring up the SNMP TRAP Receiver IP tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box
that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an SNMP TRAP receiver address.
5. Configure the SNMP Trap receiver address (the IP address of the network
management server in use), UDP port number, community name and SNMP
version.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Configuring the SNMP Trap Receiver Address
2.72.7 Configuring the SNMP Time System
Configure the SNMP time system, including the interval for time synchronization and
the IP address of the network management system server.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Common ConfigíTime ConfigíTime Management from the
Operational Tree, and select the Snmp System Time Config tab.
4. Configure the EMS synchronization interval and the IP address of the EMS
server.
Version: B/1 2-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Configuring the SNMP Time System
2.82.8 Synchronizing Time
System time synchronization aims to synchronize the network management server
with the equipment in time and check whether the communication between them is
smooth.
Note:
After being connected to the network management server, the equipment
will apply to the server for time synchronization. When connected to
multiple network management servers, the equipment will apply to the
first server connected to it for time synchronization. To choose another
network management server for time synchronization of the equipment,
users can reconfigure the SNMP time system.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíTime Calibration to
bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-12.
2-12 Version: B/1
2 Adding Equipment
Figure 2-12 Synchronizing System Time
4. Click OK to start executing the time synchronization command.
5. After the time calibration is completed successfully, click the Close button.
2.92.9 Saving Current Configuration to Flash
To prevent loss of equipment configuration data subsequent to power failure, it is
recommended that users should take this operation after they have completed
service provisioning and function configuration.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash
to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 2-13.
Version: B/1 2-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 2-13 Saving Current Configuration to Flash
4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.
5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.
2-14 Version: B/1
33 Configuring Voice Services
The following introduces how to start up the voice services for the AN5006-20.
Note:
The PSTN voice service is supported by the MCUA card only; while the
NGN voice service is supported by the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-
EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and MCU-GPON2 card.
Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - H.248
Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service - SIP
Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service
Common Configuration
MEGACO / MGCP Configuration
SIP Configuration
Registering / Unregistering the MGC
Registering / Unregistering the NGN User
Viewing the Voice Statistics Information
Version: B/1 3-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.13.1 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -H.248
The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the H.248 protocol.
3.1.13.1.1 Configuration Rules
u When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to the H.248 protocol for VoIP
services, and set the protocol port No. to 2944.
u The POTS card provides 64 interfaces; the CASA / POTS32 card provides 32
interfaces.
u When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name,
please note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the
variable part - the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part
must be smaller than 6000.
3.1.23.1.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the
H.248 protocol.
3-2 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Network Diagram
Figure 3-1 Network Diagram for the H.248 Voice Service
The H.248 protocol separates the signaling from the RTP flow to access the users'
voice services. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS
cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.
3.1.33.1.3 Planning Data
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service
Item Description Example
Enabling the
POTS port
Slot No.Configure this item according to the actual
situations.4
Port No.Configure this item according to the actual
situations.1 to 64
Enable
When the voice service is configured, this
item must be set to Enable. Otherwise the
service cannot be accessed.
Enable
Version: B/1 3-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Configuring
the uplink
service VLAN
Service ID Read-only item. 1
Service Name
The user can enter numbers, letters and
underlines not exceeding 30 characters for
the subscriber service name.
ngn
Starting VLAN ID
The starting VLAN ID of the service. Value
range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and
4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.
200
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the service. Value
range: 1 to 4095 (excluding 4088, 4089, and
4092). The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.
200
Port No. / Trunk Group
ID
The port number of the service or the Trunk
group number.
If the uplink port has joined the Trunk group,
the system only displays the Trunk group
number, instead of the uplink port number.
GE1
Port Tag / Untaguntag indicates stripping the VLAN tag; tag
indicates keeping the VLAN tag.tag
Configuring
the voice
VLAN
VoIP Vlan Type
Read-only. The options include signal vlan
and RTP vlan. The signal vlan refers to the
VLAN tag carried by the voice signaling
flow, while the RTP vlan refers to the VLAN
tag carried by the voice flow.
signal vlan RTP vlan
Service NAME Unconfigurable. Null by default currently. -
Svlan TpidThe protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to
65534. The default setting is 33024.33024
Svlan Id
The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or the
VLAN ID in the single-tagged mode. The
VLAN ID should be within the uplink port
VLAN range. The value ranges from 1 to
4085, and should not be null.
200
Svlan CoS
The service VLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest
priority level and 0 the lowest. The default
value is 7.
7
3-4 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Cvlan Tpid
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1 to
65534. The default setting is 33024. Users
need not configure this item when single
VLAN is used.
33024
Cvlan Id
The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode. Users
need not configure this item in the single-
VLAN mode.
10 20
Cvlan CoS
The user VLAN priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority
while 0 is the lowest. The default setting is 7.
Users need not configure this item when
single VLAN is used.
7
Configuring
Megaco /
MGCP
softswitch
platform
parameters
Primary MGCThe IP address or domain name of the
primary softswitch platform MGC.192.168.1.1
Primary MGC Port
The communication port of the primary
softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges
from 0 to 65535, and the default value is
2944.
2944
Secondary MGCThe IP address or domain name of the
secondary softswitch platform MGC.192.168.2.1
Secondary MGC Port
The communication port of the secondary
softswitch platform MGC. The value ranges
from 0 to 65535, and the default value is
2944.
2944
Keep Alive
Controls whether the ONU regularly sends
keep-alive messages to the softswitch
platform MGC. Options available are Enable
Initiative, Enable Passive and Disable.
Enable Initiative
Alive Interval (s)
The interval of sending the keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1 to
86400 (unit: s), and the default value is 30.
30
Alive Times
The maximum timeout times that the
softswitch platform MGC permits the ONU to
send the keep-alive messages; if the value
is exceeded, it is considered that the MGC
loses its communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The default
setting is 3.
3
Version: B/1 3-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Alive FormatThe options include Notify and Service
Change.Notify
Configuring
the voice IP
address
IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static
Signal IP
The IP address and the subnet mask of the
management control card's CPU. The IP
address is used to communicate with the
MGC.
IPv4:192.168.1.101 /
255.255.255.0
Signal GatewayThe address of the signaling gateway, used
to forward the data of the MGC.IPv4:192.168.1.254
RTP IPThe IP address and the subnet mask of the
management control card's DSP
IPv4:192.168.2.101/
255.255.255.0
RTP Gateway
The address of the RTP gateway. This
gateway is used to forward the RTP flow
communicating with other MGs.
IPv4:192.168.2.254
Primary DNS
The IP address of the primary domain name
system. Users need configure the DNS only
when the domain name is used as the MGC
address. In this example, IP address is used
as the MGC address, so you need not
configure the DNS.
-
Second DNS
The IP address of the secondary domain
name system. Users need configure the
DNS only when the domain name is used as
the MGC address. In this example, IP
address is used as the MGC address, so
you need not configure the DNS.
-
PPPoE Operation
Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The options
include dial and disconnect. The default
value is disconnect.
-
PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -
PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -
PPPoE Authentication
The authentication mode of the PPPoE. The
options include PAP and CHAP. The default
setting is PAP.
-
DHCP Operation Enables or disables the DHCP function. -
DHCP Option60 Enable
Enables or disables the DHCP Option60
function, and controls whether to add the
terminal identifier.
-
3-6 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
DHCP Option60 BaseThe fixed part of the Option60 terminal
identifier.-
DHCP Option60 SuffixThe suffix value of the Option60 terminal
identifier.-
Configuring
basic voice
parameters
Domain Name
The domain name of the gateway. The
default setting is null; configured according
to actual conditions. If the Softswitch
platform requires registration in terms of
domain name, the user should apply for a
domain name for the equipment from the
Softswitch center.
When the domain name is null, the system
will use the following as domain name by
default: voice signaling IP address: local
protocol port number.
-
Local Protocol Port
The communication port of the softswitch
platform MGC. The value ranges from 0 to
65534, and the default value is 0.
2944
Protocol Encode Type
Select the text encoding type (compact
encode or uncompact encode). The
default value is uncompact encode.
uncompact encode
Transport Protocol TypeSelect the transmission layer protocol (TCP
or UDP). The default value is UDP.UDP
Configuring
the RTP
resource
profile
RTP Name Fixed Part
The fixed part of the RTP resource name. If
the RTP resource name is RTP/1000, the
fixed part should be RTP/. The default value
is RTP/.
RTP/
RTP Name Begin Value
The start value of the variable part of the
RTP resource name; the start value must be
smaller than the end value. The value
ranges from 0 to 65534, and the default
value is 4000.
4000
RTP Name End Value
The end value of the variable part of RTP
name. It must be larger than the start value
of the variable part. The value ranges from 0
to 65534, and the default value is 9000.
9000
RTP Name Step Value
The step of the variable part of RTP
resource name. The value ranges from 1 to
65534, and the default value is 1.
1
Version: B/1 3-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-1 Planning Data for the H.248 Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
RTP Name Fill
Select whether to pad the bits following the
fixed part (RTP/) with zeros automatically to
fill the tetrad, for example, to pad RTP/0 to
RTP/0000. Configure according to the
actual condition. The default value: filled.
filled
Configuring
the voice port
Slot No.The number of the slot accommodating the
POTS card.4
Port No.The POTS card port physically connected
with the subscriber's phone.1 to 64
PHONEThe Termination ID corresponds to the port
for identifying the physical end point.B1 to B64
DSP Profile IDConfigure the DSP profile to be bound with
the port. The default value is Default.Default
3.1.43.1.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the H.248 protocol is
shown in Figure 3-2.
3-8 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-2 Flow of H.248 Voice Service
3.1.53.1.5 Enabling the POTS Port
Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 3-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.
5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-4.
3-10 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-4 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)
3.1.63.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-5.
Version: B/1 3-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
3.1.73.1.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN
Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.
Precautions
u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.
u When configuring the voice VLAN, make sure the service name here is
consistent with the service name in the uplink port VLAN configuration.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to
open the Voip Service VLAN tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-6 Configuring the Voice VLAN
3-12 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.1.83.1.8 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch PlatformParameters
Configure the IP address of the MGC and the protocol port number of the NGN.
When the softswitch platform uses the H.248 protocol to control the access
terminals, you should set the MGC protocol type to H.248 for VoIP services, and the
protocol port No. to 2944.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP
ConfigíMegaco/MGCP SoftSwitch Config to bring up the Megaco/MGCP
SoftSwitch Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7 Configuring Megaco / MGCP Softswitch Platform Parameters
3.1.93.1.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress
When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 3-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open
the Voice IP Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8 Configuring the Voice IPAddress
3.1.103.1.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters
Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 2944, and the protocol encoding type to uncompacted
encoding.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to
open the Voice Base Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-9 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters
3-14 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.1.113.1.11 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile
Configure the parameters relating to the RTP resource profile, especially, set the
value in the RTP flow packet header in the H.248 protocol.
When configuring the step of the variable part of the RTP resource name, please
note that the value 0 cannot be used, and the value of (end value of the variable part
- the start value of the variable part)/the step of the variable part must be smaller
than 6000.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP
ConfigíMegaco RTP Config Profile to bring up the Megaco RTP Config
Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-10.
Figure 3-10 Configuring the RTP Resource Profile
3.1.123.1.12 Configuring the Voice Port
Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.
Version: B/1 3-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to
open the Voice Port Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Configuring the Voice Port
3.1.133.1.13 Configuration End
After completing the configuration of voice services based on the H.248 protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.
3.1.143.1.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status
Check the registration status of the current ONU and MGC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
3-16 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Checking the Voice Equipment Status
Result
The voice equipment has the following three statuses.
u registering
u register successful
u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.
3.1.153.1.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status
The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-13.
Version: B/1 3-17
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-13 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status
3.1.163.1.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status
Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-14.
Figure 3-14 Checking the DSP Channel Status
Result
The DSP channel has the following two statuses.
u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.
3-18 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal
conversation.
3.1.173.1.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status
Check the port status information of the current user.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-15.
Figure 3-15 Checking the NGN User Port Status
Result
The user port has the following statuses:
u Registering
u Idle
u Off-hook
u Dialing
u Ringing
u Ring back tone
u Connecting
Version: B/1 3-19
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
u Connected
u Release connection
u Register failed
u Unactivated
u Line fault
u Busy
3.23.2 Example of Configuring NGN Voice Service -SIP
The following gives an example to introduce how to configure the VoIP service using
the SIP protocol.
3.2.13.2.1 Configuration Rules
u When the softswitch platform uses the SIP protocol to control the access
terminal, select the protocol port 5060.
u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.
u The configuration items such as the SIP authentication user name, the SIP
authentication password, and the SIP subscriber call configuration profile ID
can be edited only when the SIP protocol is used in the system.
3.2.23.2.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 voice services based on the SIP.
3-20 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Network Diagram
Figure 3-16 Network Diagram for the SIP Voice Service
The protocol SIP implements the voice services of users with the signaling and RTP
flow separated. The signaling communicates with the softswitch platform of the
upper level directly, and the RTP flow is forwarded to the designated MG via the
media server.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access the voice services using the CASA, POTS32 or POTS
cards. In this example, a POTS card is used.
3.2.33.2.3 Planning Data
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service
Item Description Example
Enabling the
POTS port
Slot No.Configure this item according to the
actual situations.4
Port No.Configure this item according to the
actual situations.1 to 64
Enable
When the voice service is configured,
this item must be set to Enable.
Otherwise the service cannot be
provisioned.
Enable
Configuring
the uplink
service VLAN
Service ID Read-only item. 1
Version: B/1 3-21
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Service Name
The user can enter numbers, letters
and underlines not exceeding 30
characters for the subscriber service
name.
ngn
Starting VLAN ID
The starting VLAN ID of the service.
Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting
VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.
600
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the service.
Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting
VLAN ID should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.
600
Port No. / Trunk Group ID
The port number of the service or the
Trunk group number.
If the uplink port has joined the Trunk
group, the system only displays the
Trunk group number, instead of the
uplink port number.
GE1
Port Tag / Untag
Untag indicates stripping the VLAN
tag; tag indicates keeping the VLAN
tag.
tag
Configuring
the voice
VLAN
VoIP VLAN Type
Read-only. The options include signal
vlan and RTP vlan. The signal vlan
refers to the VLAN tag carried by the
voice signaling flow, while the RTP
vlan refers to the VLAN tag carried by
the voice flow.
signal vlan RTP vlan
Service NAMEUnconfigurable. Null by default
currently.-
Svlan Tpid
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is
33024.
33024
3-22 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Svlan Id
The SVLAN ID in the QinQ mode or
the VLAN ID in the single-tagged
mode. The VLAN ID should be within
the uplink port VLAN range. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095, and should not
be null.
600
Svlan CoS
The service VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands for
the highest priority level and 0 the
lowest. The default value is 7.
7
Cvlan Tpid
The protocol identifier, ranging from 1
to 65534. The default setting is
33024. Users need not configure this
item when single VLAN is used.
33024
Cvlan Id
The CVLAN ID in the QinQ mode.
Users need not configure this item in
the single-VLAN mode.
60 70
Cvlan CoS
The user VLAN priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 is the
highest priority while 0 is the lowest.
The default setting is 7. Users need
not configure this item when single
VLAN is used.
7
Configuring
the SIP server
SipProxySerAddrThe IP address or domain name of
the active SIP proxy server.192.168.5.101
SipProxyPort
The port number of the active SIP
proxy server. The default setting is
5060.
5060
BackupSipProxySer-
vAddr
The IP address or domain name of
the standby SIP proxy server.
Configure this item according to the
planning data.
192.168.6.101
BackupSipProxyPort
The port number of the standby SIP
proxy server. The default setting is
5060.
5060
SipRegisterAddrThe IP address or domain name of
the active SIP registrar.192.168.5.101
SipRegisterPortThe port number of the active SIP
registrar. The default setting is 5060.5060
Version: B/1 3-23
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
BackupSipRegisterAddrThe IP address or domain name of
the standby SIP registrar.192.168.6.101
BackupSipRegisterPortThe port number of the standby SIP
registrar. The default setting is 5060.5060
Sip Register Interval (s)
After being registered on the SIP
server, an ONU needs to send the
register messages to the SIP server
periodically. That is, in the register
refresh period, the ONU needs to
send the register information to the
SIP server to keep the validity of its
registration on the SIP server.
The value ranges from 60 to 3600; the
unit is second; and the default value is
3600.
3600
Keep Alive
Controls whether the ONU regularly
sends keep-alive messages to the
softswitch platform MGC. Options
available are Initiative, Passive and
Disable.
Initiative
Alive Interval (s)
The interval of sending the keep-alive
messages. The value ranges from 1
to 43200 (unit: s), and the default
value is 30.
30
Alive Times
The maximum timeout times that the
softswitch platform MGC permits the
ONU to send the keep-alive
messages; if the value is exceeded, it
is considered that the MGC loses its
communication with the ONU. The
value ranges from 1 to 120. The
default setting is 3.
3
Alive ModeThe options include By Device and
By Port.By Device
Configuring
the voice IP
address
IP Config Mode Supports the static mode. static
Signal IP
The IP address and the subnet mask
of the management control card's
CPU. The IP address is used to
communicate with the MGC.
IPv4:192.168.1.101 /
255.255.255.0
3-24 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Signal GatewayThe address of the signaling gateway,
used to forward the data of the MGC.IPv4:192.168.1.254
RTP IPThe IP address of the management
control card's DSP.
IPv4:192.168.2.101 /
255.255.255.0
RTP Gateway
The address of the RTP gateway.
This gateway is used to forward the
RTP flow communicating with other
MGs.
IPv4:192.168.2.254
Primary DNS
The IP address of the primary domain
name system. The DNS needs
configuration only when the MGC
configuration uses the domain name.
In this example, IP address is used as
the MGC address, so you need not
configure the DNS.
-
Second DNS
The IP address of the secondary
domain name system. Users need
configure the DNS only when the
domain name is used as the MGC
address. In this example, IP address
is used as the MGC address, so you
need not configure the DNS.
-
PPPoE Operation
Controls the PPPoE DIP switch. The
options include dial and disconnect.
The default value is disconnect.
-
PPPoE Username The user name for PPPoE dialing. -
PPPoE Password The password for PPPoE dialing. -
PPPoE Authentication
The authentication mode of the
PPPoE. The options include PAP and
CHAP. The default setting is PAP.
-
DHCP OperationEnables or disables the DHCP
function.-
DHCP Option60 Enable
Enables or disables the DHCP
Option60 function, and controls
whether to add the terminal identifier.
-
DHCP Option60 BaseThe fixed part of the Option60
terminal identifier.-
DHCP Option60 SuffixThe suffix value of the Option60
terminal identifier.-
Version: B/1 3-25
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
Configuring
basic voice
parameters
Domain Name
The domain name of the gateway.
The default setting is null; configured
according to actual conditions. If the
Softswitch platform requires
registration in terms of domain name,
the user should apply for a domain
name for the equipment from the
Softswitch center.
When the domain name is null, the
system will use the following as
domain name by default: voice
signaling IP address: local protocol
port number.
-
Local Protocol Port
The communication port of the
softswitch platform MGC. The value
ranges from 0 to 65534, and the
default value is 0.
5060
Protocol Encode Type
Select the text encoding type
(compact encode or uncompact
encode). The default setting is
uncompact encode.
uncompact encode
Transport Protocol Type
Select the transmission layer protocol
(TCPor UDP). UDPis selected by
default.
UDP
Configuring
SIP digitmapSIP digitmap
The digitmap is mainly used by the
MG to determine whether all dial-ups
have been collected. The SIP protocol
does not define the digitmap, and
most of the terminals use the method
of dialing # first and then reporting the
number. The configuration of the
digitmap can omit the step of dialing
#.
Configure this item according to the
practical project requirements.
[0-9ABCD].|[EF][0-9ABCDEF].
Configuring
the voice port
Slot No.The number of the slot
accommodating the POTS card.4
Port No.
The POTS card port physically
connected with the subscriber's
phone.
1 to 64
3-26 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-2 Planning Data for the SIP Voice Service (Continued)
Item Description Example
PHONE
The actual telephone number of a
certain port on the ONU. Its value
must be unique.
88881101 to 88881164
DSP Profile ID
The name of the DSP profile bound
with the SIP user telephone number.
The default setting is Default.
Default
SIPUSER
The user name for authenticating a
certain port of the ONU on the SIP
register sever. When the protocol type
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.
88881101 to 88881164
SIPPASSWD
The password for authenticating a
certain port of the ONU on the SIP
register sever. When the protocol type
is H.248 or MGCP, users need not
configure this item.
test
SIP User Call Config
Profile ID
Some functions of the ONU will be
enabled or disabled based on the
profile settings after the ONU is bound
to the profile.
Default
3.2.43.2.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow to provision the voice service using the SIP protocol is shown
in Figure 3-17.
Version: B/1 3-27
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-17 Flow of SIP Voice Service
3.2.53.2.5 Enabling the POTS Port
Enable ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card on the AN5006-20 according to the service
planning and demand. By doing so, the subscribers' voice services can be normally
accessed.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
3-28 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the POTS card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.
5. Select Enable in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and enter 64 in
the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 3-18.
Figure 3-18 Enabling Ports in a Batch Manner
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-19.
Version: B/1 3-29
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-19 Enabling the POTS Port (Completed)
3.2.63.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-20.
3-30 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-20 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
3.2.73.2.7 Configuring the Voice VLAN
Configure the parameters related to the voice service VLAN. Users can configure
the VLANs for the signaling service and the RTP flow respectively.
Precautions
u It is recommended that users configure the signaling VLAN and the RTP VLAN
with the same VLAN IDs. If the signaling flow and the RTP flow have different
designated IP addresses, their VLAN IDs can be also different.
u Users need only configure the service VLAN instead of the user VLAN when
single VLAN is applied in the network. However, if QinQ VLAN is applied in the
network, users need configure both the service VLAN and the user VLAN
according to the network planning.
u When configuring the the VoIP voice service VLAN, make sure the service
VLAN ID is within the range of the uplink port VLAN IDs, and the uplink port
VLAN ID is within the range of the OLT local VLAN IDs.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoip Service VLAN to
open the Voip Service VLAN tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-21.
Version: B/1 3-31
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-21 Configuring the Voice VLAN
3.2.83.2.8 Configuring the SIP Server
Configure the related parameters of the SIP server. The SIP server includes the
register server and proxy server.
u As a network logical entity, the proxy server can represent the client end to
forward or respond to a request. That is, it can serves as the client end and the
server at the same time. Its main functions include routing, calling control,
service providing, AAA (Authentication, Authorization and Accounting), and so
on.
u The register server accepts the ONU register request, and then saves and
processes the related information of the ONU register.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP
Server Config to open the SIP Server Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-22.
Figure 3-22 Configuring the SIP Server
3-32 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.2.93.2.9 Configuring the Voice IPAddress
When the signaling IP address configuration mode is static, users need configure
the signaling IP address, the signaling mask, the signaling gateway, the RTP IP
address, the RTP mask, and the RTP gateway.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice IP Config to open
the Voice IP Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23 Configuring the Voice IPAddress
3.2.103.2.10 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters
Configure basic voice parameters, setting the transport protocol type to UDP, the
local protocol port to 5060, and the protocol encoding type to compacted encoding.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Base Config to
open the Voice Base Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
Version: B/1 3-33
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-24.
Figure 3-24 Configuring Basic Voice Parameters
3.2.113.2.11 Configuring the SIP Digitmap
The digitmap is mainly used by the MG to determine whether all dial-ups have been
collected. The SIP protocol does not define the digitmap, and most of the terminals
use the method of dialing # first and then reporting the number. The configuration of
the digitmap can omit the step of dialing #.
After configuring the digitmap of the SIP protocol, when the user dials, the number
should match the dialing scheme in the digitmap and then be reported to the
softswitch platform only when a match is found. The SIP digitmap function is
optional and can be configured when required by the operator.
Note:
Users should configure the SIP digitmap according to practical conditions,
so as to enable quick match of telephone numbers.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP
digitmap to open the SIP digitmap tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-25.
3-34 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-25 Configuring the SIP Digitmap
3.2.123.2.12 Configuring the Voice Port
Configure parameters relevant to the voice port, and configure the port user name
and the DSP profile, so as to bind the port user name and the user port.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Port Config to
open the Voice Port Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-26.
Figure 3-26 Configuring the Voice Port
Version: B/1 3-35
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.2.133.2.13 Configuration End
After completing the configuration of voice services based on the SIP protocol,
check the equipment status as follows.
3.2.143.2.14 Checking the Voice Equipment Status
Check the registration status of the ONU and MGC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
Voice Device Status to access the Voice Device Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-27.
Figure 3-27 Checking the Voice Equipment Status
Result
The voice equipment has the following three statuses.
u registering
u register successful
u register failed. The failure may be caused by the inconsistency between the IP
configuration & user name configuration of the MGC / ONU and the local
planning data.
3-36 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.2.153.2.15 Viewing the Voice IPAddress Status
The following introduces how to view the status of the IP voice service and the
related parameters of the IAD module in the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
Voice IP Status to access the Voice IP Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-28.
Figure 3-28 Checking the Voice IPAddress Status
3.2.163.2.16 Checking the DSP Channel Status
Check the DSP timeslot channel status (busy or idle) and the timeslot occupancy.
One user port corresponds to one timeslot and occupies the timeslot when the user
port is busy.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíVoice Informationí
DSP Channels Status to access the DSP Channels Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-29.
Version: B/1 3-37
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-29 Checking the DSP Channel Status
Result
The DSP channel has the following two statuses.
u Busy: the user corresponding to the channel is in conversation.
u Idle: no endpoint user name is configured or the user is not in normal
conversation.
3.2.173.2.17 Checking the NGN User Port Status
Check the port status information of the current user.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ServiceíNGN User Port Status in the Operational Tree pane
to bring up the NGN User Port Status tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
data from the equipment, as shown in Figure 3-30.
3-38 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-30 Checking the NGN User Port Status
Result
The user port has the following statuses:
u Registering
u Idle
u Off-hook
u Dialing
u Ringing
u Ring back tone
u Connecting
u Connected
u Release connection
u Register failed
u Unactivated
u Line fault
u Busy
3.33.3 Example of Configuring PSTN Voice Service
The following introduces how to configure the PSTN voice service.
Version: B/1 3-39
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.3.13.3.1 Configuration Rule
The AN5006-20 provides four E1 links in total. Each link provides 32 timeslots: the
timeslot 0 acts as the frame header, the timeslot 16 acts as the signaling timeslot (C
channel), and the others are used for transmitting the PSTN voice service. When a
user goes off-hook and uses the PSTN voice service, the remote node to be
connected (taking AN3300-C1 as an example) distributes one timeslot of E1 as the
voice channel. The voice service can be accessed via the cross-connect between
the timeslot and the user port.
u Only the MCUA card of the AN5006-20 supports the PSTN voice service.
u The AN5006-20 supports up to four POTS or CASA cards. When using four
POTS cards, the can implement access of up to 256 PSTN voice users; when
using four CASA cards, the can implement access of up to 128 PSTN voice
users.
u The communication between the AN5006-20 and the AN3300-C1 requires the
timeslot 16 of at least one E1 link as the C channel. If multiple C channel
switches of E1 links are enabled, the AN5006-20 will select the timeslot 16 of
the first E1 link as the active C channel and the timeslots 16 of other E1 links as
the standby C channel.
For example, the AN5006-20 is connected with the AN3300-C1 via the 2nd and
3rd E1 link and the two E1 links enable the C channel. The AN5006-20 will
select the timeslot 16 of the 2nd E1 link as the active C channel and the
timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link as the standby C channel. If the second E1 link is
faulty, the AN5006-20 will automatically select the timeslot 16 of the 3rd E1 link
as the active C channel.
u The AN5006-20's active / standby clock configuration can be acquired from the
E1 link of the connected AN3300-C1.
u The AN5006-20's E1 data configuration and C channel configuration should be
consistent with the AN3300-C1.
u The AN5006-20's remote node name is the local node name of the AN3300-C1.
The local node name of the AN5006-20 will be displayed in the node data table
of the AN3300-C1.
3-40 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
u The user ID of the V5 PSTN user data configuration of the AN5006-20 is used
for user identification for the AN3300-C1, and should be consistent with the V5
user data configuration of the AN3300-C1.
3.3.23.3.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the POTS card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 PSTN voice services.
Network Diagram
Figure 3-31 Network of PSTN Voice Services
The AN5006-20 accesses the users' PSTN voice service data via the POTS
interface card and transmits the data to the management control card for processing.
After that, the data are sent to the AN3300-C1 via the E1 uplink interface of the
management control card, and the AN3300-C1 uplinks the data to the V5 switch, so
that the POTS users can access the PSTN network.
Hardware Configuration
Use the MCUA card as the management control card, and the CASA card, the
POTS32 card and the POTS card as the service cards to access voice services. In
the example given below, one POTS card is used.
Version: B/1 3-41
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.3.33.3.3 Planning Data
In the example, the AN3300-C1 is uplinked to the V5 switch via the 1st to 4th E1
links and downlinked to one AN5006-20 via the 5th to 8th E1 links. The AN5006-20
has 100 POTS subscribers.
Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side
Item Description Example
Configuring
the Local Node
Name
Local node
name
Configure the local node name of the
AN3300-C1 according to the operator's
network planning.
fiber
Configuring E1
Data
E1 No.Configure this item according to the E1
serial number that is actually used.1 to 4 5 to 8
Switch Enables the connected E1 interface. Enable
Framemode
Select non-frame mode, CRC multiframe
mode or framing mode according to the
operator's network planning.
CRC multiframe framemode
ImpedanceSelect the E1 interface impedance that
is actually used.75©
LinkID
Configure the E1 link ID connected with
the V5 switch according to the operator's
network planning.
0 to 3 -
Configuring
Clock Data
Main Clock
Mode
Sets the acquirement mode of the active
clock.Extracts from the 1st E1
Backup Clock
Mode
Sets the acquirement mode of the
standby clock.Extracts from the 2nd E1
V5 Config
V5 serialThe V5 serial number will be
automatically generated.1
V5 NameConfigure this item according to the
operator’s network planning.fiberv5
V5 type
Select the protocol type supported by
the V5 interface according to the
network planning of the operator.
V5.2
V5 ID
Configure the V5 interface ID for switch
identification according to the network
planning of the operator.
2
V5 variant
Configure the V5 interface variable
according to the network planning of the
operator.
0
3-42 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)
Item Description Example
E1 list
Configure the E1 serial number
connected with the V5 switch according
to the operator's network planning.
1 to 4
C Channel
Config
E1 No.
Configure the E1 serial number to be the
C channel according to the operator's
network planning.
1 2 5 6
Timeslot
Select the timeslot 16 as the C channel
according to the network planning of the
operator.
16
Channel type
Select C channel type according to the
network planning of the operator.
Select the working and protection C
channels for the uplink (the type of the
working channel is Active, and the type
of the protection channel is aux).
The downlink C channel is the node
communication channel.
Active auxNode-C
Channel
Cpath ID
Configure the active C channel identifier
according to the network planning of the
operator.
1 - -
protocol
Select C channel signaling protocol
according to the network planning of the
operator.
Ctrl Bcc Link ctrl
Protect Pstn isdn-
Configuring
Node Data
Node nameThe name of the local node connected
with the AN5006-20.aa
E1 listThe serial number of E1 actually
connected with the AN5006-20.5 to 8
Configuring
the V5 PSTN
User Data
V5 NameSelect the V5 interface name according
to the network planning of the operator.fiberv5
Start Protocol
Address
Configure the starting value of the L3
address distributed by the V5 switch
according to the operator's network
planning.
1
Relative node
Configure the local node name of the
AN5006-20 according to the operator's
network planning.
aa
Start User ID
Configure the starting value of the user
ID bound with the L3 address according
to the operator's network planning.
1
Version: B/1 3-43
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 3-3 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1 Side (Continued)
Item Description Example
user number
Configure accessed POTS user quantity
according to the network planning of the
operator.
100
Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side
Item Description Example
Configuring
the Local
Node Data
Local node name
Configure the local node name of
the AN5006-20 according to the
operator's network planning.
aa
Configuring
E1 Data
E1 Port No.
Configure this item according to
the E1 serial number that is
actually used.
1 2 3 4
SwitchEnables the connected E1
interface.Enable
Frame mode
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator. This item should be
consistent with the AN3300-C1.
framemode
Impedance
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator. This item should be
consistent with the AN3300-C1.
75©
Cchannel Switch
Select the timeslot 16 as the C
channel according to the network
planning of the operator.
Enable Enable Disable Disable
Configuring
Clock
Main Clock ModeSets the acquirement mode of the
active clock.Extracts from the 1st E1
Backup Clock
Mode
Sets the acquirement mode of the
standby clock.Extracts from the 2nd E1
Remote Node
Name Config
Remote Node
Name
Configure the local node name of
the AN3300-C1 according to the
operator's network planning.
fiber
E1-1 to E1-4The serial number of E1 actually
connected with the AN3300-C1.E1-1 to E1-4
Configuring
the V5 PSTN
User Data
Slot No.
Select the POTS card interface
that is actually used according to
the operator's network planning.
3 4
3-44 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Table 3-4 Planning Data of the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20 Side (Continued)
Item Description Example
Port No.
Select the POTS card interface
that is actually used according to
the operator's network planning.
1 to 64 1 to 36
Remote Node
Name
Configure the local node name of
the AN3300-C1 according to the
operator's network planning.
fiber
User ID
Configure the user ID bound with
the L3 address according to the
operator's network planning.
1 to 64 65 to 100
Version: B/1 3-45
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.3.43.3.4 Configuration Flow
Figure 3-32 Flow of Configuring PSTN Voice Service
3.3.53.3.5 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN3300-C1
The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice
service on the AN3300-C1.
3-46 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.3.5.13.3.5.1 Configuring the Local Node Name
When the AN3300-C1 serves as the remote node of the AN5006-20, set the local
node name for easy identification by the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and select the Local Node Name Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Configuring the Local Node Name
3.3.5.23.3.5.2 Configuring E1 Data
Configure basic parameters of the uplink and downlink E1 links of the AN3300-C1.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the E1 Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
Version: B/1 3-47
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Configuring E1 Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)
3.3.5.33.3.5.3 Configuring Clock Data
Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN3300-C1.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the Clock Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35 Configuring Clock Data
3.3.5.43.3.5.4 Configuring V5 Data
Configure the AN3300-C1's V5 parameters that match the V5 switch.
3-48 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 Config tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 data configuration entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-36.
Figure 3-36 Configuring V5 Data
3.3.5.53.3.5.5 Configuring Channel C
Configure parameters of the C channel that connects the AN3300-C1 with the V5
switch and the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the C Channel Config tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 4 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add four Channel C configuration
entries.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
Version: B/1 3-49
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37 Configuring C Channel Data
3.3.5.63.3.5.6 Configuring Node Data
Configure parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the Node Config tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a node data configuration entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-38.
Figure 3-38 Configuring Node Data
3.3.5.73.3.5.7 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data
Configure user parameters of the node connected with the AN3300-C1 downlink.
3-50 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE AN3300-C1 in Main Topology to bring up the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 Service Config in the
Operational Tree pane, and then select the V5 PSTN User Config tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a V5 PSTN user data
configuration entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN3300-C1 Side)
3.3.5.83.3.5.8 Saving Current Configuration to Flash
Save the current configuration data to the AN3300-C1's Flash, so as to avoid loss of
the equipment configuration data as a result of power failure.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash
to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-40.
Version: B/1 3-51
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-40 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN3300-C1 Side)
4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.
5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.
3.3.63.3.6 Configuring the PSTN Voice Service on the AN5006-20
The following introduces the steps and methods of configuring the PSTN voice
service on the AN5006-20.
3.3.6.13.3.6.1 Configuring the Local Node Data
Configure the local node name of the AN5006-20 for identifying the remote node
(the AN3300-C1).
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3-52 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíLocal Node Name
Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Local Node
Name Configuration tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 Configuring the Local Node Data
3.3.6.23.3.6.2 Configuring E1 Data
Configure the E1 link of the AN5006-20 for connection with the AN3300-C1.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíE1 Configuration in the
Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Configuration tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-42.
Figure 3-42 Configuring E1 Data (the AN5006-20 Side)
Version: B/1 3-53
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.3.6.33.3.6.3 Configuring Clock
Configure the way of acquiring the active and standby clocks for the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíClock Configuration in the
Operational Tree pane to bring up the Clock Configuration tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-43.
Figure 3-43 Configuring Clock
3.3.6.43.3.6.4 Configuring the Remote Node Data
Configure the data for the remote node (the AN3300-C1) connected with the
AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíRemote Node Data
Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the Remote Node
Data Configuration tab.
3-54 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
4. Click Add on the toolbar, and type 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK to add a remote node data configuration
entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-44.
Figure 3-44 Configuring the Remote Node Data
3.3.6.53.3.6.5 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data
Configure the V5 PSTN user data of the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select POTS ConfigíV5 Voice Service ConfigíV5 PSTN User
Configuration in the Operational Tree pane to bring up the V5 PSTN User
Configuration tab.
4. In the Switch Object pane, select the ports 1 to 64 of the POTS card in Slot 3
and the port 1 to 36 of the POTS card in Slot 4.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-45.
Version: B/1 3-55
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-45 Configuring the V5 PSTN User Data (the AN5006-20 Side)
3.3.6.63.3.6.6 Saving Current Configuration to Flash
Save configuration to the AN5006-20's Flash, so as to avoid the AN5006-20
configuration data loss caused by power failure.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash
to bring up the Issue the command alert box, as shown in Figure 3-46.
3-56 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-46 Saving Current Configuration to Flash (at the AN5006-20 Side)
4. Click OK to start saving the configuration data to Flash.
5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.
3.3.73.3.7 Configuration Result
After completing the configuration of PSTN voice services, check the equipment
status as follows.
3.3.7.13.3.7.1 Checking E1 Status
Check the E1 link status of the AN5006-20 to check whether the E1 configuration is
successful.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíE1 Status in the
Operational Tree pane to bring up the E1 Status tab.
Version: B/1 3-57
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar, and the Link Status of the four E1
links will display Normal, which suggests correct configuration of the E1 links.
However, if other statuses are displayed, check for any errors in the
configuration. The normal display is as shown in Figure 3-47.
Figure 3-47 Checking E1 Status
3.3.7.23.3.7.2 Checking Node Status
Check the node status of the AN5006-20 and whether the node data configuration is
successful.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíV5 Voice Get InformationíNode Status in the
Operational Tree pane to bring up the Node Status tab.
4. Click Read from Device on the toolbar. If the connections between the four E1
links and the node are displayed as Normal and the sequence number of the
signaling E1 is not 0, the node configuration is correct; otherwise, check for any
error in the configuration. The status is shown in Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48 Checking Node Status
3-58 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.43.4 Common Configuration
The following introduces the common configurations items for voice services.
3.4.13.4.1 Configuring POTS Common Parameters
Configure the related parameters of the POTS card, mainly include user dialing,
accounting, off-hook / onhook and voice parameters. The pulse duration should be
set less than the FLASH duration.
Note:
The following introduces the access method for configuring the POTS
common parameters on the network management system, applicable for
the MCUB, MCUC, MCUD, MCU-EPON, MCU-EPON2, MCU-GPON and
MCU-GPON2 cards.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOTS General
Parameter to bring up the POTS General Parameter tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-49.
Figure 3-49 Configuring POTS Common Parameters
Version: B/1 3-59
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.4.23.4.2 Configuring the Voice Timer
Set the related parameters of the digitmap to control the report time of the number
that subscribers dial. The start timer is only applicable to the H.248 protocol, while
the maximum wait time, long timer, short timer and digitmap notify are applicable to
the H.248 and SIP protocols.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíVoice Timer to open the
Voice Timer tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-50.
Figure 3-50 Configuring the Voice Timer
3.4.33.4.3 Configuring the DSP Profile
Configure the parameters related to DSP speech encoding, including speech
encoding mode, voice quality, volume, DTMF, and so on. The Default profile cannot
be modified or deleted.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3-60 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíDSP Configuration
Profile to bring up the DSP Configuration Profile tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-51.
Figure 3-51 Configuring the DSP Profile
3.4.43.4.4 Configuring Fax Parameters
Configure the related parameters of fax, including the mode, coding mode, fax
report function and packet transmission / receiving time interval used by fax. The
item VBD Enable can only be configured when the fax mode is set to T30
Transparent.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíFax Parameter to bring
up the Fax Parameter tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-52.
Figure 3-52 Configuring Fax Parameters
Version: B/1 3-61
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.4.53.4.5 Configuring the POS Telephone Number
The following introduces how to configure the POS service telephone number. The
POS number is provided by UnionPay Center. The equipment identifies the POS
services using the POS telephone number and optimizes the POS telephone
number.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíPOS Phone Number to
open the POS Phone Number tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a POS phone number
entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the UnionPay
Center.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-53.
Figure 3-53 Configuring the POS Telephone Number
3.4.63.4.6 Configuring the IPT Number
The following introduces how to configure the Intelligent Public Telephone (IPT)
number. The prefix of the IPT number is provided by the IPT platform. The
equipment identifies the IPTservice using the IPT number and optimizes the IPT
number.
3-62 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíIPT Phone Number to
open the IPT Phone Number tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add an IPT phone number
entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the data provided by the IPT platform.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54 Configuring the IPT Number
3.4.73.4.7 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone
This command is used to configure the timeout duration of different signal tones
after users pick up the telephone.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSignal Tone Timer
Config to open the Signal Tone Timer Config tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
Version: B/1 3-63
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-55.
Figure 3-55 Configuring the Timeout Duration of the Signal Tone
3.4.83.4.8 2833 Configuration
2833 is the RTP payload format used by the DTMF digital signal, phone tone and
phone signal. This function is used if no related parameters of the 2833 signaling
negotiation exist.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS Serviceí2388 Config to open the
2388 Config tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-56.
Figure 3-56 Configuring 2833
3.53.5 MEGACO / MGCP Configuration
The following introduces the voice service MEGACO / MGCP configuration items.
3-64 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.5.13.5.1 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication
Configure the MD5 authentication of the voice service for the authentication
between the MG and MGC. The MD5 authentication is applicable to the H.248
protocol only.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP
ConfigíVoice MD5 Authentication to bring up the Voice MD5
Authentication tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data of the project.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-57.
Figure 3-57 Configuring Voice MD5 Authentication
3.5.23.5.2 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout ProcessingParameters
Users can configure this parameter to ensure the consistency of the softswitch
platform status and the ONU equipment side status after the howler tone times out.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
Version: B/1 3-65
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP
ConfigíVoice Off Hook Warning Tone Timeout to bring up the Off Hook
Warning Tone Timeout tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-58.
Figure 3-58 Configuring the Howler Tone Timeout Processing Parameters
3.5.33.5.3 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode
Configure the caller ID display mode for subscribers. The caller ID display modes
include FSK and DTMF.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíMEGACO/MGCP
ConfigíCaller ID Mode to bring up the Caller ID Mode tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-59.
Figure 3-59 Configuring the Caller ID Display Mode
3-66 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3.63.6 SIP Configuration
The following introduces how to make advanced SIP configurations and how to
configure the SIP subscriber call profile.
3.6.13.6.1 SIPAdvanced Configuration
This configuration is used for the intercommunication of the softswitch platform, and
is applicable to the softswitch platforms offered by different manufacturers. It is
advisable to use the default configuration.
In the configuration of user call configuration profile, if the three-party calling
function is disabled, the Call CW/CONF Mode parameter in the SIP advanced
configuration is invalid.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP
Advanced Config to open the SIPAdvanced Config tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-60.
Figure 3-60 SIPAdvanced Configuration
Version: B/1 3-67
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.6.23.6.2 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile
Some of the ONU voice functions will be enabled or disabled according to the profile.
After being bound to the profile, the ONU port will get its configuration from the
profile. It is advisable to use the default configuration.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíSIP ConfigíSIP User
Call Config Profile to open the SIP User Call Config Profile tab.
4. Configure according to the default values.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-61.
Figure 3-61 Configuring the SIP User Call Profile
3.73.7 Registering / Unregistering the MGC
Register or unregister the MGC currently connected to the AN5006-20. When the
currently connected MGC is unregistered, the AN5006-20 will disconnect from the
current MGC and automatically connect with the standby MGC. This operation is
applicable to the H.248 protocol.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3-68 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíMGC Register/
Unregister to open the MGC Register/Unregister tab.
4. Set the register/unregister status to Register, and the MGC IP address to
192.168.1.1.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Registering / Unregistering the MGC
3.83.8 Registering / Unregistering the NGN User
Register or unregister the user port of the POTS card to / from the MGC of the
Softswitch platform. Users can no longer use the port once the port is unregistered.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíNGN User Register/
Unregister to open the NGN User Register/Unregister tab.
4. Click Add on the toolbar. In the Please Input the Rows for Add: dialog box
that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK.
5. Set the port number to 1, and register/unregister status to Register.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 3-63.
Figure 3-63 Registering / Unregistering the NGN Users
Version: B/1 3-69
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3.93.9 Viewing the Voice Statistics Information
The following introduces how to view the voice statistics information.
3.9.13.9.1 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet
The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the signaling
packets between the AN5006-20 and the softswitch platform MGC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíSignal Packets Statistic
Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the Signal Packets Statistic
Information tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-64.
Figure 3-64 Viewing the Statistics Information of Signaling Packet
3.9.23.9.2 Viewing the Call Statistics Information
The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data flow
transmitted and received by the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3-70 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in
the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar and read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-65.
Figure 3-65 Viewing the Call Statistics Information
3.9.33.9.3 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice StreamPort
The following introduces how to view the statistics information of the RTP data
stream at the POTS port on the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíRTP Stream Port Statistics
Information in the Operational Tree to bring up the RTP Stream Port
Statistics Information tab.
4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.
5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-66.
Version: B/1 3-71
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 3-66 Viewing the Statistics Information of Voice Stream Port
3.9.43.9.4 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information
The following introduces how to view the statistics information of calls at the POTS
port on the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíVoice InformationíCall Statistics Information in
the Operational Tree to bring up the Call Statistics Information tab.
4. In the Switch Object pane, select the POTS card and click OK.
5. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the configuration
information, as shown in Figure 3-67.
3-72 Version: B/1
3 Configuring Voice Services
Figure 3-67 Viewing the Port Call Statistics Information
Version: B/1 3-73
44 Configuring Data Services
The following introduces how to start up the data services for the AN5006-20.
Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Transparent Mode
Example of Configuring ADSL Data Services in the Tag Mode
Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
Example of Configuring the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
Version: B/1 4-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.14.1 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Servicesin the Transparent Mode
The following introduces how to configure ADSL data service in the transparent
mode.
4.1.14.1.1 Configuration Rules
u The AN5006-20 equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag,
transparent transmission, 1:1 translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet
frames uplinked from the user end. In this example, the transparent
transmission mode is used.
u When users use the AD64 card as the service interface card, the Ethernet
frames uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an
intelligent switch or a home gateway. Then the AN5006-20 transparently
transmits the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to
the providers network.
u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the transparent transmission
mode, and the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original
messages by default.
4.1.24.1.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.
4-2 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Network Diagram
Figure 4-1 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode
The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 100 to 163 on the
terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the
providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.
4.1.34.1.3 Planning Data
The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the uplink
service VLANService Name
Configure this item according
to the network planning of the
operator. The service name
should contain no more than
30 characters.
data1
Version: B/1 4-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
Starting VLAN ID
The starting VLAN ID of the
uplink port service. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095
(excluding 4088, 4089, and
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.
1000
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the
uplink port service. The value
ranges from 1 to 4095
(excluding 4088, 4089, and
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.
1000
Port No. / Trunk Group ID
The port number of the uplink
service VLAN or the Trunk
ground number.
GE1
Port Tag/Untag
Set the uplink service VLAN
tag processing mode. Two
options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the
tags of the uplink packets
will be stripped
automatically when they
pass the uplink port and
the packets will be
transmitted in the untag
form.
u In the tag mode, the tags
of the uplink data packets
will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.
tag
Configuring the ADSL
line profileProfile Name
Configure this item according
to the network planning of the
operator.
adsl
4-4 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
Transmission Mode
Configure this item according
to the operator’s network
planning; the default setting is
Adsl2+Adsl2 G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Adsl2+ Adsl2
G.dmt ReAdsl2
upRateMode
Uplink channel rate mode;
three modes are available:
fixed, adaptAtStart and
adaptAtRuntime. The default
mode is adaptAtStart.
adaptAtStart
downRateMode
Downlink channel rate mode;
three modes are available:
fixed, adaptAtStart and
adaptAtRuntime. The default
mode is adaptAtStart.
adaptAtStart
Line Type
Five types are available:
NoChannel, Fast, interleave
(by default), FastOrInterleave,
and FastAndInterleave.
interleave
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to
100000; the unit is kbit/s; and
the default value is 0 kbit/s.
0
Min Rate Up (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to
100000; the unit is kbit/s; and
the default value is 0 kbit/s.
0
SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
Max SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to
31; the unit is dB; and the
default value is 31dB.
31
Max SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to
31; the unit is dB; and the
default value is 31dB.
31
Min SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to
31; the unit is dB; and the
default value is 0dB.
0
Min SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to
31; the unit is dB; and the
default value is 0dB.
0
Version: B/1 4-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)
The value ranges from 0 to
63; the unit is ms; and the
default value is 16ms.
16
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)
The value ranges from 0 to
63; the unit is ms; and the
default value is 16ms.
16
Min INP Dn
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value
is 0 Symbol.
0 Symbol
Min INP Up
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value
is 0 Symbol.
0 Symbol
Bit Swap Dn
Enables or disables the
downlink bit swap function.
The default value is Disable.
Disable
Bit Swap Up
Enables or disables the uplink
bit swap function. The default
value is Disable.
Disable
Power Mode
Four power modes are
available: L0Mode, L2Mode,
L3Mode, L2AndL3Mode. The
default setting is L0Mode.
L0Mode
Pm L0 Time (s)
The value range is 0 to 65534;
the unit is second; and the
default value is 300 seconds.
300
Pm L2 Time (s)
The value range is 0 to 65534;
the unit is second; and the
default value is 30 seconds.
30
Pm L2 Atprt (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to
15; the unit is dB; and the
default value is 3dB.
3
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 1024;
the unit is kbit/s; and the
default value is 32kbit/s.
32
Start Frequency Band (tone) / End
Frequency Band (tone)
Sets the ToneBlackout band.
The default setting is null.-
4-6 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
Binding ADSL ports
to the ADSL line
profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64
card that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
Profile IdThe configured ADSL line
profile.adsl
Configuring the PVC
profile
Profile Name
Configure according to the
network planning of the
operator. The maximum
length is 20 characters. The
default value is DEFPVC.PRF.
DEFPVC.PRF
PVCNOThe PVC index number. The
value ranges from 0 to 7.0
VPI
The value ranges from 0 to
255, and the default value is
8.
8
VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to
65535; the default value is 35.35
Binding ADSL ports
to the PVC profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64
card that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
Profile IdSelect the configured PVC
profile.DEFPVC.PRF
Configuring the port
rate limiting profile
Profile Name
Configure this item according
to the network planning of the
operator. The profile name
should contain no more than
20 characters. The default
profile name is NULL.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
US Policing Status
Enables or disables the uplink
Policing status function. The
default setting is Disable.
Enable
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value ranges from 64 to
1000000; the unit is kbit/s;
and the default value is 64
kbit/s.
512
Version: B/1 4-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000
US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.2000
DS Policing Status
Enables or disables the
downlink Policing status
function. The default setting is
Disable.
Enable
DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to
1000000; the unit is kbit/s;
and the default value is
64kbit/s.
8000
DS PIR (Kbit/s)
The value ranges between 0
and 16777215; the unit is
kbit/s.
10240
Binding ADSL ports
to the rate limiting
profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64
card that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
Profile IDSelect the configured rate
limiting profile.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
Configuring the port
service VLAN
Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64
card in actual use.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
PVCNOThe PVC in actual use. The
value range is from 0 to 7.0
Service Type
The service types include
unicast and multicast. The
data service is unicast.
Unicast
CVLAN Mode
Configure the CVLAN mode
for this service; the tag mode,
the transparent mode and the
translation mode are
supported.
Transparent
4-8 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
CVLAN Rule ID
Rules of the CVLAN
translation. When rules are
required, this parameter is the
name of the user-defined rule;
when rules are not required,
set this parameter to null.
NULL
CVLAN Settings
TPID The default value is 33024. 33024
VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from
1 to 4095.100 to 163
Priority or COS
The CVLAN priority, ranging
from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest
priority level, and 0 is the
lowest one.
0
QinQ State
The stacked VLANs.
Configure this item according
to the network planning of the
operator. Select Enable or
Disable.
Enable
QinQ Rule ID
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is
the name of the user-defined
rule. When rules are not
required, set this parameter to
null.
NULL
QinQ Settings
Priority or COS
The SVLAN priority, ranging
from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest
priority level, and 0 is the
lowest one.
0
VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from
1 to 4095.1000
TPID 33024 33024
Enabling the ADSL
port
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64
card that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
Enable
Enables or disables the ADSL
port. The default setting is
Disable.
Enable
Version: B/1 4-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-1 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission Mode
(Continued)
Item Description Example
Enabling the port
PVC
Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64
card in actual use.3
Port NumberThe port number of the AD64
card in actual use.1 to 64
PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The
value ranges from 0 to 7.0
PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC.
The default setting is Disable.Enable
4.1.44.1.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow of the ADSL data service in the transparent mode is shown in
Figure 4-2.
4-10 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-2 Flow of Configuring the ADSL Data Service - Transparent Mode
Version: B/1 4-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.1.54.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
4.1.64.1.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile
Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
4-12 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode
4.1.74.1.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile
Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL
Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
Version: B/1 4-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-6 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)
4.1.84.1.8 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile
Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.
4-14 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort
Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode
4.1.94.1.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile
Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
Version: B/1 4-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode
4.1.104.1.10 Configuring the PVC Profile
Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.
The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC
Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-9.
4-16 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-9 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode
4.1.114.1.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile
Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Version: B/1 4-17
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-10 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)
4-18 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.1.124.1.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Version: B/1 4-19
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-13 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.
9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
4-20 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode
12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Version: B/1 4-21
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-15 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode
4.1.134.1.13 Enabling the ADSL Port
Enable the ADSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or transmit
data.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
4-22 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Enabling ADSL Ports for ADSL Services in the Transparent Transmission Mode
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-17.
Figure 4-17 Enabling the ADSL Ports for the ADSL Service in the Transparent Transmission
Mode (Completed)
Version: B/1 4-23
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.1.144.1.14 Enabling the Port PVC
Enable the port PVC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the
AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-18.
4-24 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-18 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode
5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.
6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-19 .
Figure 4-19 Completion of Enabling Port PVC-ADSL Service Transparent Mode
Version: B/1 4-25
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.1.154.1.15 Configuration Result
PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after configuration is completed.
4.24.2 Example of Configuring ADSL Data Servicesin the Tag Mode
The following introduces how to configure the ADSL data service in the Tag mode.
4.2.14.2.1 Configuration Rules
u The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frames uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example, we use the Tag mode.
u When the subscriber uses the AD64 card as the service interface card, the
subscriber's PCs are connected with ports on the interface cards provided by
the equipment through the modems. To be specific, packets from the
subscribers are all untagged. The Ethernet frames are respectively added with
the stacked VLANs by the AN5006-20 and then uplinked to the upper layer
network.
4.2.24.2.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 data services.
4-26 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Network Diagram
Figure 4-20 Network Diagram for the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode
The AN5006-20 adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000 to the inner CVLAN tags 100 to
163 on the terminal side, and then transmits the data to the providers network. In the
downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.
4.2.34.2.3 Planning Data
The AD64 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the
uplink service
VLAN
Service Name
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator. The service name should
contain no more than 30
characters.
data2
Version: B/1 4-27
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Starting VLAN ID
The starting VLAN ID of the
service. Value range: 1 to 4095
(excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092).
The starting VLAN ID should not
be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
1000
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the
service. The value ranges from 1
to 4095 (except 4088, 4089, and
4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the
ending VLAN ID.
1000
Port No. / Trunk Group ID
The port number of the uplink
service VLAN or the Trunk ground
number.
GE1
Port Tag / Untag
The uplink service VLAN tag
processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the uplink port and
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will
not be stripped when they
pass the uplink port.
tag
Configuring the
ADSL line profile
Profile Name
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator.
adsl
Transmission Mode
Configure this item according to
the operator’s network planning;
the default setting is Adsl2+Adsl2
G.dmt ReAdsl2.
Adsl2+ Adsl2
G.dmt ReAdsl2
upRateMode
Uplink channel rate mode; three
modes are available: fixed,
adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.
The default mode is adaptAtStart.
adaptAtStart
4-28 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
downRateMode
Downlink channel rate mode;
three modes are available: fixed,
adaptAtStart and adaptAtRuntime.
The default mode is adaptAtStart.
adaptAtStart
Line Type
Five types are available:
NoChannel, Fast, interleave (by
default), FastOrInterleave, and
FastAndInterleave.
interleave
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 100000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 0kbit/s.
0
Min Rate Up (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 100000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 0kbit/s.
0
SNRM Dn (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
SNRM Up (dB) The default value is 6.0 dB. 6.0
Max SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
unit is dB; and the default value is
31dB.
31
Max SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
unit is dB; and the default value is
31dB.
31
Min SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
unit is dB; and the default value is
0dB.
0
Min SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0 to 31; the
unit is dB; and the default value is
0dB.
0
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
unit is ms; and the default value is
16ms.
16
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)
The value ranges from 0 to 63; the
unit is ms; and the default value is
16ms.
16
Min INP Dn
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value is 0
Symbol.
0 Symbol
Version: B/1 4-29
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Min INP Up
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value is 0
Symbol.
0 Symbol
Bit Swap Dn
Enables or disables the downlink
bit swap function. The default
value is Disable.
Disable
Bit Swap Up
Enables or disables the uplink bit
swap function. The default value is
Disable.
Disable
Power Mode
Four power modes are available:
L0Mode, L2Mode, L3Mode,
L2AndL3Mode. The default setting
is L0Mode.
L0Mode
Pm L0 Time (s)
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
unit is second; and the default
value is 300 seconds.
300
Pm L2 Time (s)
The value range is 0 to 65534; the
unit is second; and the default
value is 30 seconds.
30
Pm L2 Atprt (dB)The value range is 0 to 15; the unit
is dB; and the default value is 3dB.3
Pm L2 Rate (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 1024; the
unit is kbit/s; and the default value
is 32kbit/s.
32
Start Frequency Band (tone) / End
Frequency Band (tone)
Sets the ToneBlackout band. The
default setting is null.-
Binding ADSL
ports to the
ADSL line profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card
that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
Profile Id The configured ADSL line profile. adsl
Configuring the
PVC profile
Profile Name
Configure according to the
network planning of the operator.
The maximum length is 20
characters. The default value is
defaultPvcPrf.
DEFPVC.PRF
PVCNOThe PVC index number. The value
ranges from 0 to 7.0
4-30 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
VPIThe value ranges from 0 to 255,
and the default value is 8.8
VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to
65535; the default value is 35.35
Binding ADSL
ports to the PVC
profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card
that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. DEFPVC.PRF
Configuring the
port rate limiting
profile
Profile Name
Configure this item according to
the network planning of the
operator. The profile name should
contain no more than 20
characters. The default profile
name is NULL.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
US Policing Status
Enables or disables the uplink
Policing status function. The
default setting is Disable.
Disable
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 64kbit/s.
512
US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000
US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000
DS Policing Status
Enables or disables the downlink
Policing status function. The
default setting is Disable.
Enable
DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 64kbit/s.
8000
DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240
Binding ADSL
ports to the rate
limiting profile
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card
that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
Version: B/1 4-31
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Profile IDSelect the configured rate limiting
profile.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
Configuring the
port service
VLAN
Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64 card
in actual use.3
Port NumberThe port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value
ranges from 0 to 7.0
Service Type
The service types include unicast
and multicast. The data service is
unicast.
Unicast
CVLAN Mode
Configure the CVLAN mode for
this service; the tag mode, the
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.
TAG
CVLAN Rule ID
Rules of the CVLAN translation.
When rules are required, this
parameter is the name of the user-
defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.
NULL
CVLAN Settings
TPID The default value is 33024. 33024
VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
4095.100 to 163
Priority or COS
The CVLAN priority, ranging from
0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority
level, and 0 is the lowest one.
0
QinQ State
The stacked VLANs. Configure
this item according to the network
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
Enable
QinQ Rule ID
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
name of the user-defined rule.
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.
NULL
QinQ Settings Priority or COS
The SVLAN priority, ranging from
0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority
level, and 0 is the lowest one.
0
4-32 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-2 Planning Data for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
4095.1000
TPID 33024 33024
Enabling the
ADSL port
Slot No.The slot number of the AD64 card
that is actually used.3
Port No.The port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
EnableEnables or disables the ADSL
port. The default setting is Disable.Enable
Enabling the port
PVC
Slot NumberThe slot number of the AD64 card
that is actually used.3
Port NumberThe port number of the AD64 card
in actual use.1 to 64
PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The value
ranges from 0 to 7.0
PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC. The
default setting is Disable.Enable
4.2.44.2.4 Configuration Flow
The flow of configuring the ADSL data service in the Tag mode is shown in
Figure 4-21.
Version: B/1 4-33
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-21 The Configuration Flow of the ADSL Data Service in the Tag Mode
4-34 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.2.54.2.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
4.2.64.2.6 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile
Configure basic parameters of the ADSL line profile, including parameters such as
the uplink / downlink rate mode and line type.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
Version: B/1 4-35
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
ADSL Line Profile to open the ADSL Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new ADSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-23 Configuring the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
4.2.74.2.7 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile
Bind designated ports to the set ADSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíADSL
Port Binding Line Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the ADSL Port
Binding Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 in the Initial list box, enter 0 in the Step text box, and
enter 64 in the Repeat text box, as shown in Figure 4-24.
4-36 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-24 Modifying the ADSL Line Profile in a Batch Manner
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Binding ADSL Ports to the ADSL Line Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode (Completed)
4.2.84.2.8 Configuring the PVC Profile
Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.
Version: B/1 4-37
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
The AD64 card provides 64 ADSL user ports; and one ADSL port corresponds to
eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services, and one
ADSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is, the
subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC
Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-26.
Figure 4-26 Configuring the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
4.2.94.2.9 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile
Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
4-38 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding PVC Profile. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile Id in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-28.
Version: B/1 4-39
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-28 Binding ADSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
(Completed)
4.2.104.2.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile
Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort
Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
4-40 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.2.114.2.11 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile
Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
AD64 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Binding ADSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the ADSL Service in the Tag
Mode
4.2.124.2.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the AD64 card based on
unicast service flow.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 4-41
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the ADSL Service in the Transparent
Transmission Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 4-32.
4-42 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-32 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.
9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
Version: B/1 4-43
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-33.
Figure 4-33 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the ADSL Service in the
Transparent Transmission Mode
12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-34.
4-44 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-34 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Tag Mode
4.2.134.2.13 Enabling the ADSL Port
Enable the ADSL port. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
Version: B/1 4-45
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
6. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Enabling the ADSL Port for the ADSL Service in the Tag Mode (Completed)
4-46 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.2.144.2.14 Enabling the Port PVC
Enable the port PVC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the
AD64 card to be configured in the Select object window that appears, and then
click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner in the Tag Mode
Version: B/1 4-47
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Click OK, and the PVCs with the index number 0 of the 64 ports will be set to
Enable in a batch manner.
6. Return to the PVC Enable window, and click the Create on Device button on
the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Completion of Enabling Port PVC for ADSL Service in the Tag Mode
4.2.154.2.15 Configuration Result
PC1 to PC64 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.
4.34.3 Example of Configuring the VDSL DataService in the 1:1 Translation Mode
The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the 1:1
translation mode.
4.3.14.3.1 Configuration Rules
u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,
the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.
u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.
4-48 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
u When the ATM is used, the PVC function must be configured and the VDSL
service is validated in the PVC. When the PTM is used, the PVC function
should not be configured and the VDSL service is validated in the port.
u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. In this example the 1:1 translation mode is configured.
u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent
switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is
translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is
translated into a different VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the
SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.
u The user-defined COS value will be invalid in the 1:1 translation mode, and the
system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages by
default.
4.3.24.3.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 32 data services.
Network Diagram
Figure 4-39 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
Version: B/1 4-49
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 131 on the terminal side into the
CVLAN tags 200 to 231, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data
to the upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes
place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an VD32 card is used.
4.3.34.3.3 Planning Data
The VD32 card in Slot 2 of the AN5006-20 serves as the interface card at the user
side. The management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory cards. The planning data are shown in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the
uplink service
VLAN
Service Name
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The service name should contain
no more than 30 characters.
data3
Starting VLAN ID
The starting VLAN ID of the
service. Value range: 1 to 4095
(excluding 4088, 4089, and 4092).
The starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.
1000
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the service.
Value range: 1 to 4095 (excluding
4088, 4089, and 4092). The
starting VLAN ID should not be
larger than the ending VLAN ID.
1000
Port No. / Trunk Group ID
The port number of the uplink
service VLAN or the Trunk ground
number.
GE1
4-50 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Port Tag / Untag
The uplink service VLAN tag
processing mode. Two options are
available: tag and untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of
the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the uplink port and
the packets will be transmitted
in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of
the uplink data packets will not
be stripped when they pass
the uplink port.
tag
Configuring the
VDSL line basic
profile
Profile NameConfigure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.vdline
Port Mode
The data encapsulation mode.
When the equipment is connected
with the ADSL Modem, select ATM;
otherwise select PTM. The options
include ATM, PTM and ADAPT.
PTM
Standard Profile
The equipment supports eight
standard profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D,
12A, 12B, 17A and 30A) and the
comprehensive mode ALL, so as to
improve its ability to adapt to
complex scenarios. The digital
number in the value stands for the
maximum cut-off frequency, while
the letter stands for the power
features. For example, 17A means
that the maximum cut-off frequency
is 17 MHz and the maximum
downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is ALL.
ALL
Version: B/1 4-51
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Psd Shape
Defines the Tx power at each
frequency point. Each group of
definitions makes up a power
spectrum, including A_EU_128,
B7_BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.
B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_
A
MaxTxPowerDn (dBm)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 25.5
(unit: dBm), accurate to one
decimal place. The default setting
is 20.5 dBm.
20.5
MaxTxPowerUp (dBm)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 20.2
(unit: dBm), accurate to one
decimal place. The default setting
is 14.5 dBm.
14.5
RFI Set
Set the start frequency band and
end frequency band for the RFI
notch according to the actual
condition.
-
ToneBlackout SetSet the filtering starting and ending
bands as required.-
Binding VDSL
ports to the VDSL
line basic profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card
actually used.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card
actually used.1 to 32
Profile IdSelect the configured basic VDSL
line profile.vdline
Configuring the
VDSL service
profile
Profile NameConfigure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.vdservice
upRateMode
The options include fixed,
adaptAtStart, and
adaptAtRuntime.
adaptAtStart
downRateMode
The options include fixed,
adaptAtStart, and
adaptAtRuntime.
adaptAtStart
4-52 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Target SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 6.0 dB.
6.0
MaxSNRMDnMode
The options include user define
and unlimited. The default setting
is user define.
User define
Max SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 31.0.
31.0
Min SNRM Dn (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 0.0.
0.0
Target SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 6.0.
6.0
MaxSNRMUpMode
The options include user define
and unlimited. The default setting
is user define.
User define
Max SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 31.0.
31.0
Min SNRM Up (dB)
The value ranges from 0.0 to 31.0
(unit: dB), accurate to one decimal
place. The default setting is 0.0.
0.0
Max Rate Dn (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 200000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 128000.
128000
Min Rate Dn (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
unit is kbit/s; and the default value
is 64.
64
Max Rate Up (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 200000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 128000.
128000
Min Rate Down (Kbit/s)
The value range is 0 to 200000; the
unit is kbit/s; and the default value
is 64.
64
Max Interleave Delay Dn (ms)The value range is 0 to 63; the unit
is ms; and the default value is 16.16
Version: B/1 4-53
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Max Interleave Delay Up (ms)The value range is 0 to 63; the unit
is ms; and the default value is 16.16
Min INP Dn
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value is 0
Symbol.
0 Symbol
Min INP Up
The value ranges from 0 to 16
Symbol, and the default value is 0
Symbol.
0 Symbol
Binding VDSL
ports to the VDSL
service profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card
actually used.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card
actually used.1 to 32
Profile IdSelect the configured VDSL service
profile.vdservice
Configuring the
port rate limiting
profile
Profile Name
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.
The profile name should contain no
more than 20 characters. The
default profile name is NULL.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
US Policing Status
Enables or disables the uplink
Policing status function. The
default setting is Disable.
Enable
US Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 64.
512
US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000
US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to
4294967294; the unit is Byte.20000
DS Policing Status
Enables or disables the downlink
Policing status function. The
default setting is Disable.
Enable
DS Policing CIR (Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000;
the unit is kbit/s; and the default
value is 64.
8000
DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240
4-54 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Binding VDSL
ports to the rate
limiting profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card
actually used.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card
actually used.1 to 32
Profile IdSelect the configured rate limiting
profile.
PORTRATE.
PRF0
Configuring the
port service
VLAN
Slot NumberThe slot number of the VD32 card
actually used.1
Port NumberThe port number of the VD32 card
actually used.1 to 32
PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value
ranges from 0 to 7.0
Service Type
The service types include unicast
and multicast. Select unicast for the
data service.
Unicast
CVLAN Mode
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the
transparent mode and the
translation mode are supported.
Translation
CVLAN Rule ID
Rules of the CVLAN translation.
When rules are required, this
parameter is the name of the user-
defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.
NULL
CVLAN Settings
TPID The default value is 33024. 33024
VLAN IDThe CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
4095.100 to 131
Priority or COS
The CVLAN priority level, ranging
from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.
0
Translation
VLAN Settings
VLAN IDThe VLAN ID after translation; the
value ranges from 1 to 4095.200 to 231
Priority or COS
The translation priority level. The
value ranges from 0 to 7. 7 stands
for the highest priority while 0 the
lowest one.
0
TPID 33024 33024
Version: B/1 4-55
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-3 Planning Data for the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
QinQ State
The stacked VLANs. Configure this
item according to the network
planning of the operator. Select
Enable or Disable.
Enable
QinQ Rule ID
The QinQ rules for binding
services. This parameter is the
name of the user-defined rule.
When rules are not required, set
this parameter to null.
NULL
QinQ Settings
Priority or COS
The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0
to 7. 7 stands for the highest
priority level, and 0 the lowest one.
0
VLAN IDThe SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to
4095.1000
TPID 33024 33024
Enabling the
VDSL port
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card
actually used.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card
actually used.1 to 32
EnableEnables or disables the VDSL port.
The default setting is Disable.Enable
4.3.44.3.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the 1:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-40.
4-56 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-40 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
Version: B/1 4-57
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.3.54.3.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-41.
Figure 4-41 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
4.3.64.3.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile
Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.
Precautions
u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.
4-58 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-42.
Figure 4-42 Configuring the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode
4.3.74.3.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile
Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 4-59
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD
Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-43.
Figure 4-43 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)
4.3.84.3.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile
Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.
4-60 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation
Mode
4.3.94.3.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile
Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD
Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-45.
Version: B/1 4-61
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-45 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)
4.3.104.3.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile
Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort
Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-46.
4-62 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-46 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode
4.3.114.3.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile
Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-47.
Figure 4-47 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the 1:1
Translation Mode (Completed)
Version: B/1 4-63
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.3.124.3.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select all the 32 ports, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Figure 4-48 Selecting the Ports in the 1:1 Translation Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 4-49.
4-64 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-49 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.
9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redot refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
Version: B/1 4-65
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the 1:1 Translation Mode
12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 4-51.
4-66 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-51 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the 1:1 Translation Mode
4.3.134.3.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports
Enable the VDSL ports. The port will be unable to receive and transmit data when
disabled.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.
Version: B/1 4-67
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 4-52.
Figure 4-52 Enabling VDSL Ports for VDSL Services in the 1:1 Translation Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-53.
Figure 4-53 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the 1:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)
4.3.144.3.14 Configuration Result
PC1 to PC32 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.
4-68 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.44.4 Example of Configuring the VDSL DataService in the N:1 Translation Mode
The following introduces how to configure the VDSL data service in the N:1
translation mode.
4.4.14.4.1 Configuration Rules
u The VD32 card provides 32 VDSL user ports, and one VDSL port corresponds
to eight PVCs. One PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber services.
One VDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber services; that is,
the subscriber services are shared among the PVCs.
u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.
u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.
u The equipment supports four processing modes, i.e. Tag, transparent, 1:1
translation, and N:1 translation, for the Ethernet frame uplinked from the
subscriber end. The example is configured in the N:1 translation mode.
u When the VD32 card is used as the service interface card, the Ethernet frame
uplinked from the user side is added with the VLAN Tag via the user’s intelligent
switch or a home gateway with the ADSL uplink port. And then the VLAN ID is
translated into another valid VLAN ID by the equipment; each user VLAN ID is
translated into the same VLAN ID. After that, the service is added with the
SVLAN Tag and transmitted to the upper layer network.
u The user-defined COS value becomes invalid in the N:1 translation mode, and
the system will use the COS value carried by the tag in the original messages
by default.
Version: B/1 4-69
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.4.24.4.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the AD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access 1 data services.
Network Diagram
Figure 4-54 Network Diagram for the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
The AN5006-20 translates the CVLAN tags 100 to 101 on the terminal side into the
CVLAN tag 200, add the SVLAN tag 1000 to them, and then send the data to the
upper layer network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access data services in the transparent transmission mode
using the AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 cards. In this example, an VD32 card is used.
4.4.34.4.3 Planning Data
The VD32 card of the AN5006-20 acts as the client end interface card. The
management control card, the PWRB card and the FANB card are compulsory. The
planning data are shown in Table 4-4.
4-70 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring Uplink
Service VLAN
Service Name
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The maximum length of the
service name is 30 characters.
data4
Starting VLAN ID
The starting value of the service VLAN ID.
The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding
4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
1000
VLAN ID End
The ending value of the service VLAN ID.
The value ranges from 1 to 4095 (excluding
4088, 4089, and 4092). The starting VLAN ID
should not be larger than the ending VLAN
ID.
1000
Port number or the
trunk group ID
The port number of the uplink service VLAN
or the Trunk group number.GE1
Port Tag/Untag
Set the VLAN tag attribute of the uplink
service. The attribute includes untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the port
and the packets will be uplinked in the
untag form, while the downlink untag
packets will be added with designated
tags when they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink /
downlink data packets will not be
processed when they pass the port.
tag
Configuring the Basic
Profile of the VDSL
Line
Profile NameConfigure according to the network planning
of the operator.vdline
Port Mode
The data encapsulation mode. When the
equipment is connected with the ADSL
Modem, select ATM; otherwise select PTM.
Includes ATM, PTM, and self adapting.
PTM
Version: B/1 4-71
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Standard profile
The equipment supports eight standard
profiles (8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, 17A and
30A) and the comprehensive mode ALL, so
as to improve the ability to adapt to complex
scenarios. Among them, the digital number
means the maximum cut-off frequency, and
the letter means the power attribute. For
example, 17A means that the maximum cut-
off frequency is 17 MHz and the maximum
downlink Tx power is +14.5 dBm.
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The default setting is ALL.
ALL
Power Spectrum
Profile
Defines the Tx power at each frequency
point. Each group of definition indicates one
power spectrum, including A_EU_128, B7_
BT_ANFP, C_138_b, etc.
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The default setting is B8_11_
998ADE17_M2x_A.
B8_11_998ADE17_
M2x_A
Down Max Tx Power
The value range is from 0.0 to 25.5 (unit:
dBm) with a measurement carried to one
decimal place. The default setting is 20.5.
20.5
Max Tx power Up
The value range is from 0.0 to 20.2 (unit:
dBm) with a measurement carried to one
decimal place. The default setting is 14.5
dBm.
14.5
Slot Band Config Sets the starting and ending bands of slot. -
Filtering Band ConfigSets the starting and ending bands of
filtering.-
Binding an VDSL Port
to the VDSL Line
Basic Profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
use.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual
use.1
VDSL Line Profile The configured VDSL line profile. vdline
Configuring the VDSL
Service Profile
Profile NameConfigure according to the network planning
of the operator.vdservice
Up Rate ModeThe options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and
adaptAtRuntime.adaptAtStart
4-72 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Down Rate ModeThe options include fixed, adaptAtStart, and
adaptAtRuntime.adaptAtStart
Target SNRMDn (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 6.0.
6.0
Max SNRMDn ModeIncludes User Defined and No Limit. The
default value is User Defined.User Defined
Max SNRMDn (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 31.0.
31.0
Min SNRMDn (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 0.0.
0.0
Target SNRMUp (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 6.0.
6.0
Max. Target SNRM
Up
Includes User Defined and No Limit. The
default value is User Defined.User Defined
Max SNRMUp (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 31.0.
31.0
Min SNRMUp (dB)
The value range is from 0.0 to 31.0 (unit: dB)
with a measurement carried to one decimal
place. The default setting is 0.0.
0.0
Max Rate DownThe value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.128000
Min Rate DownThe value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 64.64
Max Rate UpThe value range is 64 to 200000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 128000.128000
Min Rate DownThe value range is 0 to 200000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 64.64
MaxInterleaveDe-
layDn (ms)
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
and the default value is 16ms.16
MaxInterleaveDelay-
Up (ms)
The value range is 0 to 63; the unit is ms;
and the default value is 16ms.16
MinINPDnThe value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and
the default value is 0 Symbol.0 Symbol
Version: B/1 4-73
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
MinINPUpThe value ranges from 0 to 16 Symbol, and
the default value is 0 Symbol.0 Symbol
Binding a VDSL Port
to the VDSL Service
Profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
use.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual
use.1
VDSL Service Profile Select the configured VDSL service profile. vdservice
Configuring Port Rate
Limiting Profile
Profile Name
Configure according to the network planning
of the operator. The maximum length of the
profile name is 20 characters. The default
profile name is NULL.
PORTRATE.PRF0
Uplink Policing statusEnables or disables the uplink Policing status
function. The default value is Disable.Enable
Uplink Port CIR
(Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.512
US CBS (Byte)The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.
The unit is Byte.2000
Uplink Excess Burst
Size (Byte)
The value range is from 0 to 4294967294.
The unit is Byte.2000
DS Policing statusEnables or disables the downlink Policing
status function. The default value is Disable.Enable
DS Policing CIR
(Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit is
kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.8000
DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value range is from 0 to 16777215. The
unit is kbit/s.10240
Binding a VDSL Port
to the Rate Limiting
Profile
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
use.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual
use.1
Profile ID Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
Configuring a Port
Service VLAN
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
use.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual
use.1
PVC indexThe PVC in actual use. The value range is
from 0 to 7.0
Service TypeThe service type, including unicast and
multicast. The data service is unicast.unicast
4-74 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Table 4-4 Planning Data of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
CVLAN Mode
The CVLAN mode for this service. The tag
mode, the transparent mode, and the
translation mode are supported.
Translation
CVlan Rule ID
Rules of the CVLAN translation. When rules
are required, this parameter is the name of
the user-defined rule; when rules are not
required, set this parameter to null.
NULL
CVlan TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
CVLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 100 to 101
CVLAN priority
The CVLAN priority level. The value ranges
from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while
0 is the lowest priority.
0
TTPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
Translation IDThe VLAN ID after translation; the value
ranges from 1 to 4095.200
Translation priority
The translation priority level. The value
ranges from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest
priority while 0 is the lowest priority.
0
QinQ Enable
The stacked VLANs, configured according to
the operator’s network planning. Select
Enable or Disable.
Enable
QinQ Rule ID
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.
NULL
QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000
QINQ priority
The SVLAN priority level. The value ranges
from 0 to 7, and 7 is the highest priority while
0 is the lowest priority.
0
Enabling the VDSL
Port
Slot No.The slot number of the VD32 card in actual
use.2
Port No.The port number of the VD32 card in actual
use.1
ENABLEFLAGEnables or disables the VDSL port. The
default setting is Disable.Enable
Version: B/1 4-75
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4.4.44.4.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow of the VDSL data service in the N:1 translation mode is
shown in Figure 4-55.
Figure 4-55 The Configuration Flow of the VDSL Data Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
4-76 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
4.4.54.4.5 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
4.4.64.4.6 Configuring the VDSL Line Basic Profile
Configure the parameters of the VDSL line basic profile, such as the port mode,
power spectrum profile, and maximum uplink / downlink Tx power.
Precautions
u The VDSL port of the VD32 card supports three transport modes: ATM, PTM,
and self adapting. Here we use the PTM mode as an example.
Version: B/1 4-77
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
u When the ATM mode is used, the PVC function should be configured and the
VDSL service becomes valid in the PVC. When the PTM mode is used, the
PVC function should not be configured and the VDSL service becomes valid at
the port.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
VDSL Line Basic Profile to bring up the VDSL Line Basic Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-57.
Figure 4-57 Configuring the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode
4.4.74.4.7 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Line Basic Profile
Bind designated ports to the set VDSL line basic profile, and the ports will control
the data stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the
profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
4-78 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD
Port Bind Basic Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Basic Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Basic Line Profile for the VDSL Service in the
N:1 Translation Mode (Completed)
4.4.84.4.8 Configuring the VDSL Service Profile
Configure the VDSL service profile, and set the parameters including the uplink /
downlink rate mode and the uplink / downlink maximum / minimum rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile Configí
VDSL Service Profile to bring up the VDSL Service Profile tab.
Version: B/1 4-79
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new VDSL service
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-59 Configuring the VDSL Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
4.4.94.4.9 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile
Bind designated ports to the set VDSL service profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the transmission rules and rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíVD
Port Bind Service Profile. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the VD Port Bind
Service Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line VDSL Service
Profile in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select vdservice from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-60.
4-80 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-60 Binding VDSL Ports to the VDSL Service Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)
4.4.104.4.10 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile
Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort
Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-61.
Version: B/1 4-81
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-61 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode
4.4.114.4.11 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile
Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding Rate Profile. In the Select Object window that appears, select the
VD32 card to be configured, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-62
4-82 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
Figure 4-62 Binding VDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the VDSL Service in the N:1
Translation Mode (Completed)
4.4.124.4.12 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the VD32 card based on
unicast service flow.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and select the line with the Port Number 1 in the
upper-right pane.
5. Click Add, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
6. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-63.
Version: B/1 4-83
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 4-63 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the N:1 Translation Mode
4.4.134.4.13 Enabling the VDSL Ports
Enable the VDSL ports. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
4. Click the entry of port No.1, and select Enable in the drop-down list of the
ENABLEFLAG.
4-84 Version: B/1
4 Configuring Data Services
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 4-64.
Figure 4-64 Enabling the VDSL Ports for the VDSL Service in the N:1 Translation Mode
(Completed)
4.4.144.4.14 Configuration Result
PC1 and PC2 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.
Version: B/1 4-85
55 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
The following introduces how to access the G.SHDSL service in the ATM and TDM
modes for the AN5006-20.
Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on ATM
Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL Service Based on TDM (Local Mode)
Version: B/1 5-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5.15.1 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL ServiceBased on ATM
The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode based on ATM.
5.1.15.1.1 Configuration Rules
ATM is a packet switch and multiplex technology based on cell. It is applicable in
LAN and WAN, with the features of fixed-length cell, connection-oriented, and good
real time performance, suitable for for the applications with high bandwidth, low
delay, and high data burst rate.
When users use the HD32A card as the service interface card, the Ethernet frames
uplinked from the user side are added with the CVLAN Tags via an intelligent switch
or a CPE uplinked with the SHDSL. Then the AN5006-20 transparently transmits
the Ethernet frames, adds SVLAN Tags to them, and uplinks them to the providers
network.
5.1.25.1.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Access 31 G.SHDSL services based on the ATM via the HD32A card of the
AN5006-20 (the ports 1 and 2 are bound together as a group to provide larger
bandwidth for PC1).
5-2 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Network Diagram
Figure 5-1 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode
The AN5006-20 transparently transmits the inner CVLAN tags 800 to 830 on the
terminal side, adds the outer SVLAN tag 1000, and then transmits the data to the
providers network. In the downlink direction, the reverse process takes place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment uses the HD32A card to access the G.SHDSL service. In this
example, an HD32A card is used.
5.1.35.1.3 Planning Data
The HD32A card in Slot 4 of the AN5006-20 acts as the subscriber side interface
card, and the management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are
compulsory. The planning data are shown in Table 5-1. Here the MCUA card acts
as the management control card.
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the uplink
port attributesSlot No.
The slot number of the MCUA card in
actual use.5
Version: B/1 5-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Port No.
The port number of the MCUA card in
actual use, including the GE1, GE2, GE3
and GE4 uplink ports.
GE3
Port TypeThe port type of the uplink card in actual
use.GE port
Auto-negotiation
Enables or disables the auto negotiation
function of the uplink port. It is not allowed
to disable the auto negotiation function of
the 10GE port.
Enable
Port Rate
The port rate of the uplink port. The default
values of the 10GE and GE ports are
10000 Mbps and 1000 Mbps respectively.
1000Mbps
Port duplex mode
The duplex mode of the uplink port,
including full duplex and half duplex. Full
duplex is the default value.
Full duplex
Port flow control
Enables or disables the flow control
function of the uplink port. It is enabled
when this item is selected, and disabled
when this item is cleared. The default
setting is Disable.
Disable
Port address
learning
Enables or disables the address learning
function of the uplink port. It is enabled
when this item is selected, and disabled
when this item is cleared. Enabled by
default.
Enable
Port priority
Enables or disables the priority function of
the uplink port. It is enabled when this item
is selected, and disabled when this item is
cleared. Enabled by default.
Enable
Port priority value
The service priority value of the uplink port,
ranging from 0 to 7. 7 stands for the highest
priority level, and 0 the lowest level. The
default setting is 0.
0
5-4 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Interface mode
The interface mode of the uplink port,
including SerDes and SGMII. The default
value is SerDes. SerDes should be
configured if the uplink port is using an
optical module or a compulsory GE
electrical module. SGMII should be
configured if the uplink port is using a
10/100/1000Mbps electrical module.
SerDes
Enabling the SHDSL
port
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card in
actual use.4
Port No.The port number of the HD32A card in
actual use.1 to 32
EnableEnables or disables the SHDSL port. The
default setting is Disable.Enable
Enabling the port
PVC
Slot NumberThe slot number of the HD32A card in
actual use.4
Port NumberThe port number of the HD32A card in
actual use.1 to 32
PVC IndexThe PVC index number. The value ranges
from 0 to 7.0
PVC EnableEnables or disables the PVC. The default
setting is Disable.Enable
Configuring the uplink
service VLAN
Service Name
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
service name should contain no more than
30 characters.
Data
Starting VLAN IDThe starting VLAN ID of the uplink port
service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.1000
Ending VLAN ID
The ending VLAN ID of the uplink port
service. The value ranges from 1 to 4095.
The starting VLAN ID should not be larger
than the ending VLAN ID.
1000
Port No. / Trunk
Group ID
The port number of the uplink service
VLAN or the Trunk ground number.5:GE3
Version: B/1 5-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Port Tag / Untag
The uplink service VLAN tag processing
mode. Two options are available: tag and
untag.
u In the untag mode, the tags of the
uplink packets will be stripped
automatically when they pass the
uplink port and the packets will be
transmitted in the untag form.
u In the tag mode, the tags of the uplink
data packets will not be stripped when
they pass the uplink port.
tag
Configuring an
SHDSL line profile
Profile NameConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.ShdslATM
Port Mode
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
options include ATM and TDM.
ATM
Code Type
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.
PAM32
Transmission
standard
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
options include Annex A and Annex B.
Annex B
Target SNR Margin
Down (dB)
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
and the default value is 6dB.6
Insure SNR Margin
Down (DB)
The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
dB; and the default value is 3dB.3
Uplink target signal-
to-noise ratio (DB)
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB;
and the default value is 6dB.6
Target SNR Margin
Up (DB)
The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is
dB; and the default value is 3dB.3
Line Probe EnableEnables or disables the line detection
function. The default setting is disable.Disable
Binding SHDSL ports
to the SHDSL line
profile
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card in
actual use.4
Port No.The port number of the HD32A card in
actual use.1 to 32
Profile ID The configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslATM
5-6 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Configuring the PVC
profile
Profile Name
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The maximum
length is 20 characters. The default value is
defaultPvcPrf.
defaultPvcPrf
PVCNOThe PVC index number. The value ranges
from 0 to 7.0
VPIThe value ranges from 0 to 255, and the
default value is 8.8
VCIThe value range is 0 and 32 to 65535; the
default value is 35.35
Binding SHDSL ports
to the PVC profile
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card
actually used.4
Port No.The port number of the HD32A card
actually used.1 to 32
Profile Id Select the configured PVC profile. defaultPvcPrf
Configuring the port
rate limiting profile
Profile Name
Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator. The
profile name should contain no more than
20 characters. The default profile name is
NULL.
PORTRATE.PRF0
US Policing Status
Enables or disables the uplink Policing
status function. The default setting is
Disable.
Enable
US Policing CIR
(Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.51200
US CBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;
the unit is Byte.20000
US EBS (Byte)The value ranges from 0 to 4294967294;
the unit is Byte.20000
DS Policing Status
Enables or disables the downlink Policing
status function. The default setting is
Disable.
Enable
DS Policing CIR
(Kbit/s)
The value range is 64 to 1000000; the unit
is kbit/s; and the default value is 64kbit/s.51200
DS PIR (Kbit/s)The value ranges between 0 and
16777215; the unit is kbit/s.10240
Version: B/1 5-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Binding SHDSL ports
to the rate limiting
profile
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card
actually used.4
Port No.The port number of the HD32A card
actually used.1 to 32
Profile Id Select the configured rate limiting profile. PORTRATE.PRF0
Configuring the
SHDSL port bound
group
M-Pair Group IdThis ID is automatically generated by the
system.-
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card
actually used.4
Master Port No.Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.1
Slave Port No.Configure this item according to the
network planning of the operator.2
Configuring the port
service VLAN
Slot No.The slot number of the HD32A card
actually used.4
Port NumberThe port number of the HD32A card
actually used.1 to 32
PVC IndexThe PVC in actual use. The value ranges
from 0 to 7.0
Service Type
The service types include unicast and
multicast. Select unicast for the data
service.
Unicast
CVLAN Mode
Configure the CVLAN mode for this
service; the tag mode, the transparent
mode and the translation mode are
supported.
Transparent
CVLAN Rule ID
Rules of the CVLAN translation. When
rules are required, this parameter is the
name of the user-defined rule; when rules
are not required, set this parameter to null.
null
TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
VLAN ID The CVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 800 to 830
Priority or COS
The CVLAN priority level, ranging from 0 to
7. 7 stands for the highest priority level, and
0 the lowest one.
0
5-8 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Table 5-1 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Transmission
Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
QinQ State
The stacked VLANs. Configure this item
according to the network planning of the
operator. Select Enable or Disable.
Enable
QinQ Rule ID
The QinQ rules for binding services. This
parameter is the name of the user-defined
rule. When rules are not required, set this
parameter to null.
null
QinQ TPID The default setting is 33024. 33024
QINQ VLAN ID The SVLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4095. 1000
QINQ priority
The SVLAN priority, ranging from 0 to 7. 7
is the highest priority level, and 0 is the
lowest one.
0
5.1.45.1.4 Configuration Flow
The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the ATM transparent mode is shown
in Figure 5-2.
Version: B/1 5-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 5-2 Configuration Flow of G.SHDSL Service - ATM Transparent Mode
5-10 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5.1.55.1.5 Configuring the Uplink Port Attributes
Configure the uplink port attributes, including parameters such as auto-negotiation
switch, the port flow control, and the port priority.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to
open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Configuring Uplink Port Properties for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode
5.1.65.1.6 Enabling an SHDSL Port
Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 5-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 Enabling SHDSL Ports for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Transmission Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-5.
5-12 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Figure 5-5 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent Mode
(Completed)
5.1.75.1.7 Enabling the Port PVC
Enable the port PVC.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree, select Common ConfigíPVC Enable. Select the
HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object window that appears, and
then click OK to open the PVC Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar. In the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box that appears, select the line PVC Enable, and enter 64 in the
Repeat field. Then select Enable from the drop-down list of Initial, and enter 0
in the Step field. Use the default settings for other parameters, as shown in
Figure 5-6.
Version: B/1 5-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 5-6 Enabling PVC for Multiple Ports in a Batch Manner - G.SHDSL Service
Configuration
5. Click OK and return to the PVC Enable window. Click theWrite to Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 Enabling Port PVC for the SHDSL Service in the Transparent Mode (Completed)
5-14 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5.1.85.1.8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the uplink VLAN tags via the AN5006-20's uplink port. The services are
distinguished by their VLAN IDs. The user services whose VLAN IDs are within the
set range will be transmitted to the upper level network by the OLTequipment
AN5116-06B. Vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode
5.1.95.1.9 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile
Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 5-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL
Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Mode
5.1.105.1.10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile
Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding
Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5-16 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5. Select ShdslATM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode (Completed)
Version: B/1 5-17
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5.1.115.1.11 Configuring the PVC Profile
Configure PVC basic parameters such as PVC index, virtual path identifier and
virtual channel identifier value for identifying each PVC.
The HD32A card provides 32 G.SHDSL user ports; and one G.SHDSL port
corresponds to eight PVCs. A PVC can be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services, and a G.SHDSL port can also be configured with up to 16 subscriber
services.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPVC
Profile to open the PVC Profile tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12 Configuring the PVC Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM Transparent
Mode
5.1.125.1.12 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile
Bind designated ports to the set PVC profile, and the ports will control the data
stream according to the transmission rules defined in the profile.
5-18 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding PVC Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding PVC
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select DEFPVC.PRF from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values
for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-14.
Version: B/1 5-19
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 5-14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the PVC Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)
5.1.135.1.13 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile
Configure the port rate limiting profile and set the parameters including uplink /
downlink Policing status and uplink / downlink port assured rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíProfile ConfigíPort
Rate Profile to bring up the Port Rate Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new port rate limiting
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-15.
5-20 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Figure 5-15 Configuring the Port Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode
5.1.145.1.14 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile
Bind designated ports to the set rate limiting profile, and the ports will control the
data stream according to the uplink rate defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Binding Rate Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select
Object window that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Binding Rate
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select PORTRATE.PRF0 from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default
values for other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-16.
Version: B/1 5-21
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 5-16 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G. SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Binding SHDSL Ports to the Rate Limiting Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)
5-22 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5.1.155.1.15 Configuring Parameters of the SHDSL Port BoundGroup
Configure the SHDSL port bound group to enhance the line rate.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíSHDSL M-Pair to open
the SHDSL M-Pair tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-18.
Figure 5-18 Configuring the SHDSL Port Bound Group Parameters for the G.SHDSL Service
in the ATM Transparent Transmission Mode
5.1.165.1.16 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN for the designated port on the HD32A card based on
unicast service flow.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
Version: B/1 5-23
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Click HD32A in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane.
Then select the 32 ports with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 5-19.
Figure 5-19 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 for the G.SHDSL Service in the ATM
Transparent Transmission Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 5-20.
5-24 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Figure 5-20 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select the Service Type check
box and select Unicast from the Initial Value drop-down list. Retain the default
values for other parameters.
9. Select the CVLAN Mode row, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down list.
Use the default values for other parameters.
10. Select the CVLAN Settings row. In the Configuration Item group box, select
the VLAN ID row, and enter 800 in the Initial Value field. Enter 1 in the Step
text box. Use the default values for other parameters.
Version: B/1 5-25
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
11. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
12. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 5-21.
Figure 5-21 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Transmission Mode
13. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
5-26 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
14. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed for the G.SHDSL Service in the
ATM Transparent Mode
5.1.175.1.17 Configuration Result
PC1 to PC31 can access Internet after the configuration is completed.
5.25.2 Example of Configuring the G.SHDSL ServiceBased on TDM (Local Mode)
The following introduces how to configure the G.SHDSL service in the transparent
transmission mode (local mode based on TDM).
5.2.15.2.1 Configuration Rules
G.SHDSL supports multiple service types, such as ATM, TDM, etc.
Version: B/1 5-27
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
TDM means the time division multiplexing mode. TDM refers to transmitting multiple
digital data, voice, and video signals at one medium at the same time via different
channels or timeslots. It needs clock synchronization, mainly used in PSTN.
5.2.25.2.2 Network Diagram
Service configuration
Access two G.SHDSL services via the HDT8A card of the AN5006-20.
Network Diagram
Figure 5-23 Network Diagram of the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode
The PBX and E1 / V.35 data private line services are accessed to the HDT8A card
of the AN5006-20 via the Modem, and the user data are transparently transmitted to
the PSTN in the uplink direction via the E1 link of the HDT8A card. In the downlink
direction, the reverse process takes place.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment uses the HDT8A and HDT8B cards to access the G.SHDSL
services. In this example, an HDT8A card is used.
5-28 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5.2.35.2.3 Planning Data
The HDT8A card in Slot 1 of the AN5006-20 acts as the service interface card; the
management control card, the PWRB card, and the FANB card are required. The
planning data are shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the
working mode
of the card
(optional)
Slot No.The slot number of the HDT8B card
that is actually used.Optional. Users need
to configure this item
when the HDT8B card
serves as the service
interface card.
1
Working Mode
Set the working mode of the HDT8B
card. The options include local
mode and remote mode.
Local
Configuring E1
data
Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card in actual use. 1
Port No. The E1 port number of the HDT8A card actually used. E1-1
Impedance
Configure this item according to the network planning of the
operator. Select the E1 interface impedance that is actually
used. The options include 75© and 120©.
75©
Configuring
clock
Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Main Clock Sets the clock acquirement mode.E1
1-LoopTimed
Enabling the
SHDSL port
Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8
EnableEnables or disables the SHDSL port. The default setting is
Disable.Enable
Configuring an
SHDSL line
profile
Profile NameConfigure this item according to the network planning of the
operator.ShdslTDM
Port ModeConfigure this item according to the network planning of the
operator. The options include ATM and TDM.TDM
Code TypeConfigure this item according to the network planning of the
operator. The options include PAM16, PAM32, and Auto.PAM32
Transmission
standard
Configure this item according to the network planning of the
operator. The options include Annex A and Annex B.Annex B
Target SNR
Margin Down
(dB)
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
value is 6 dB.6
Insure SNR
Margin Down
(DB)
The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
value is 3dB.3
Version: B/1 5-29
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 5-2 Planning Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Target SNRM Up
(DB)
The value range is -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
value is 6 dB.6
Target SNR
Margin Up (DB)
The value ranges from -10 to 21; the unit is dB; and the default
value is 3dB.3
Line Probe
Enable
Enables or disables the line detection function. The default
setting is disable.Disable
Binding SHDSL
ports to the
SHDSL line
profile
Slot No. The slot number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1
Port No. The SHDSL port number of the HDT8A card actually used. 1 to 8
Profile Id Select the configured SHDSL line profile. ShdslTDM
5.2.45.2.4 Configuration Flow
The flow of configuring the G.SHDSL service in the TDM transparent transmission
mode is shown in Figure 5-24.
5-30 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Figure 5-24 Flow Chart for Configuring the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode
5.2.55.2.5 Configuring E1 Data
Configure the impedance value of the E1 link.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service
ConfigíE1 Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears, select
Version: B/1 5-31
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the E1
Configuration tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Configuring E1 Data for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode
5.2.65.2.6 Configuring Clock
Configure the mode of acquiring the E1 link clock.
Precautions
u The equipment supports clock acquired from multiple ways, including the local
oscillator clock and the clock extracted from E1 links 1 to 8.
u If the clock of the designated E1 link is unavailable, the equipment will search
for the available E1 link automatically according to the sequence of the E1 links.
For example, users want to extract clock from the first E1 link, but this E1 link is
unavailable. In this case, the equipment will try to extract the clock in sequence
starting from the second E1 link until the clock is extracted successfully.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
5-32 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select POTS ServiceíV5 Voice Service
ConfigíClock Configuration. In the Select Object window that appears,
select the HDT8A card to be configured, and click OK to bring up the Clock
Configuration tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Configuring Clock for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent Transmission
Mode
5.2.75.2.7 Enabling the SHDSL Port
Enable the SHDSL port. When disabled, the ports will be unable to receive or
transmit data.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the HDT8A card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the line Enable in the Modify in a
batch manner dialog box.
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, enter 0 in the Step field, and click
OK, as shown in Figure 5-27.
Version: B/1 5-33
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 5-27 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Enabling the SHDSL Port for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM Transparent
Transmission Mode (Completed)
5-34 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
5.2.85.2.8 Configuring an SHDSL Line Profile
Configure basic parameters of the SHDSL line profile, such as port mode, line
encoding type and line transmission mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigProfile ConfigSHDSL
Line Profile to open the SHDSL Line Profile tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of
rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new SHDSL line
profile.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29 Configuring the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the TDM
Transparent Transmission Mode
5.2.95.2.9 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile
Bind designated ports to the set SHDSL line profile, and the ports will control data
stream according to the transmission rules and the rate limit defined in the profile.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 5-35
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíSHDSL Port Binding
Line Profile. Select the HD32A card to be configured in the Select Object
window that appears, and then click OK to open the SHDSL Port Binding Line
Profile tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button on the toolbar, and select the line Profile ID in
the Modify in a batch manner dialog box that appears.
5. Select ShdslTDM from the Initial drop-down list, and use the default values for
other parameters. Then click OK, as shown in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 5-31.
5-36 Version: B/1
5 Configuring the G.SHDSL Service
Figure 5-31 Binding SHDSL Ports to the SHDSL Line Profile for the G.SHDSL Service in the
TDM Transparent Transmission Mode (Completed)
5.2.105.2.10 Configuration Result
The POTS service and data service can access the PSTN successfully.
Version: B/1 5-37
66 Configuring the Multicast Service
The following introduces how to start up the multicast services for the AN5006-20.
Example for Multicast Service Configuration of the ADSL Card in the Proxy
Mode
Example of Configuring the Multicast Service on the VDSL Card in the
Controllable Mode
Version: B/1 6-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6.16.1 Example for Multicast Service Configurationof the ADSL Card in the Proxy Mode
The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the proxy mode.
6.1.16.1.1 Configuration Rules
u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including
joining, leaving and querying.
u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol
message.
u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the
snooping mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the
user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so
as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.
u Each AD64 card can provide up to 64 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each AD64 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.
6.1.26.1.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the AD64 card of the AN5006-20 to access 64 proxy multicast services.
6-2 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Network Diagram
Figure 6-1 Multicast Service Network in the Proxy Mode
In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the
terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20
transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home
gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access multicast services in the proxy mode using the AD32,
AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, an AD64 card is used.
6.1.36.1.3 Planning Data
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode
Item Description Example
Disabling the
Uplink Port
Multicast Packet
Suppression
Slot No.The slot number of the management control card,
being 5 fixedly.5
Port No.Configure according to the number of the actually
used uplink port.1
Packet Type Select Multicast, corresponding to multicast service. Multicast
Enable/disable Disables the multicast packet suppression function. Disable
Version: B/1 6-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Configuring
Uplink Service
VLAN
Service ID Automatically assigned by the system 1
Service NameConfigure this item according to the operator’s
network planning.iptv1
Starting VLAN IDConfigure this item according to the operator’s
network planning.200
VLAN ID EndConfigure this item according to the operator’s
network planning.200
Port No.Configure according to the number of the actually
used uplink port.GE1
Port Tag/Untag
Set the VLAN tag property of the uplink service to
untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags of the uplink
packets will be stripped automatically when they
pass the port and the packets will be uplinked in
the untag form, while the downlink untag packets
will be added with designated tags when they
pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of the uplink / downlink
data packets will not be processed when they
pass the port.
tag
Configuring
Multicast ModeIGMP Mode
Configure this item according to the operator’s
network planning.Proxy Mode
Configuring
IGMP Proxy IPIGMP Proxy IP
Configure this item according to the operator’s
network planning.10.25.10.1
Configuring
Multicast Default
VLAN
Default SVLAN ID
Configure according to the network planning of the
operator. The default multicast SVLAN ID should be in
the range of the uplink SVLAN.
200
Default CVLAN IDConfigure according to the network planning of the
operator. Retain the default value.-
Configuring a
Port Service
VLAN
Slot No.The number of the slot actually used by the AD64
card.2
Port No.The number of the port actually used by the AD64
card.1 to 64
Service Type The actual service type Multicast
6-4 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Table 6-1 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Proxy Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
CVLAN Mode
Configure the VLAN tag processing mode of the ADSL
port according to the network planning of the operator.
u TAG: Configures a VLAN tagging to the received
data.
u Translation: Translates the original VLAN ID to
one compliant with the operator's rules.
u Transparent: Transmits the received data directly.
Transparent
CVLAN IDConfigure the received VLAN ID according to the
network planning of the operator.200
Enabling the
ADSL Port
Slot No.The number of the slot actually used by the AD64
card.2
Port No.The number of the port actually used by the AD64
card.1 to 64
ENABLEFLAG Enables the ADSL port. Enable
Version: B/1 6-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6.1.46.1.4 Configuration Flow
Figure 6-2 Configuration Flow in the Proxy Mode
6.1.56.1.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast PacketSuppression
Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the equipment's uplink port, so
as to avoid rate restriction on the multicast messages.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
6-6 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom
Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression
6.1.66.1.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the
VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Version: B/1 6-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6.1.76.1.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode
Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.
Precautions
u When the multicast mode is set to proxy, the AD64 card will work in the
snooping mode, whereas the service management card, as the proxy of the
user interface card, will manage the members of the multicast group actively, so
as to reduce protocol overhead of the uplink device.
u When the multicast mode is set to snooping, both the AD64 card and the
service management card work in the snooping mode. As the configuration
procedures in this mode are similar to those of the proxy mode, only different in
the multicast mode setting; configuration examples for the snooping mode are
omitted here.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.
ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Configuring the OLT Multicast Mode
6-8 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
6.1.86.1.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress
Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to
open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IP Address in the Proxy Mode
6.1.96.1.9 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN
Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí
Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.
Version: B/1 6-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 Configuring Multicast Default VLAN
6.1.106.1.10 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the AD64 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click AD64 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 0 to 64 with the PVC Index 0, as shown in Figure 6-8.
6-10 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Figure 6-8 Selecting the Ports with PVC Index 0 in the Proxy Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports with the PVC Index 0 to the
Selected pane, as shown in Figure 6-9.
Version: B/1 6-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-9 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.
9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, and enter 200 in
the Initial Value field. User the default values for other parameters.
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
6-12 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Proxy Mode
12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-11.
Version: B/1 6-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-11 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Proxy Mode
6.1.116.1.11 Enabling the ADSL Port
Enable the ports of the AD64 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the AD64 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK to open the Port Enable tab.
4. Click the Batch Modify button, and select the Enable check box in the Modify
in a batch manner dialog box.
6-14 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
5. Select Enable from the Initial drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in
Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12 Modifying ADSL Port Enable Flag in a Batch Manner
6. Return to the Port Enable window, and you will find that the item Enable for all
the ports has been modified to Enable.
7. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown
in Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Configuration for Enabling the ADSL Port Completed
Version: B/1 6-15
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6.1.126.1.12 Configuration Result
After completing the configuration of multicast services in the proxy mode, check the
equipment status as follows.
6.1.12.16.1.12.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information
View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in
the Operational Tree pane.
4. Click the Read from Device button on the toolbar to read the current online
multicast group information. See Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information
6.1.12.26.1.12.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port
View the online multicast group information at Port 1 of the AD64 card in Slot 1
under the current multicast mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
6-16 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group
Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.
4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.
5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information for the specified port. See Figure 6-15.
Figure 6-15 Viewing Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Proxy Mode
6.1.12.36.1.12.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table
View the multicast address table of the management control card in the current
multicast mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.
InformationíMCU MC Address Table.
4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-16.
Version: B/1 6-17
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-16 Checking the Core Switch Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode
6.1.12.46.1.12.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card
View the multicast address table of the AD64 card in Slot 2 in the current multicast
mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.
InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.
4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 2.
5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Proxy Mode
6-18 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
6.26.2 Example of Configuring the Multicast Serviceon the VDSL Card in the Controllable Mode
The following introduces how to configure the multicast service in the controllable
mode.
6.2.16.2.1 Configuration Rules
u Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable mode,
whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user interface card,
manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the programs.
u Each VD32 card can provide up to 32 ADSL user interfaces. Each subscriber
can view up to 256 multicast programs and each VD32 card can support as
many as 1023 multicast programs.
u The AN5006-20 supports multicast protocol message processing, including
joining, leaving and querying.
u The AN5006-20 supports adding or translating VLANs of the user protocol
message.
6.2.26.2.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
Use the VD32 card of the AN5006-20 to access two controllable multicast services.
Version: B/1 6-19
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Network Diagram
Figure 6-18 Network Diagram for Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode
In the uplink direction, the AN5006-20 transparently transmits the VLAN ID on the
terminal side to the IPTV Server. In the downlink direction, the AN5006-20
transparently transmits the VLAN IDs of the downlink data packets. Then the home
gateway strips the VLAN IDs, and forwards the data to video subscribers.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment can access multicast services in the controllable mode using the
AD32, AD64, CASA or VD32 card. In this example, a VD32 card is used.
6.2.36.2.3 Planning Data
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode
Item Description Example
Disabling the
Uplink Port
Multicast
Packet
Suppression
Slot No.
The slot number of the
management control card, being 5
fixedly.
5
Port No.Configure according to the number
of the actually used uplink port.1
Packet TypeSelect Multicast, corresponding to
multicast service.Multicast
6-20 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Enable/disableDisables the multicast packet
suppression function.Disable
Configuring
Uplink Service
VLAN
Service IDAutomatically assigned by the
system1
Service NameConfigure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.iptv2
Starting VLAN IDConfigure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.100
VLAN ID EndConfigure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.200
Port No.Configure according to the number
of the actually used uplink port.GE1
Port Tag/Untag
Set the VLAN tag property of the
uplink service to untag or tag.
u In the UNTAG mode, the tags
of the uplink packets will be
stripped automatically when
they pass the port and the
packets will be uplinked in the
untag form, while the downlink
untag packets will be added
with designated tags when
they pass the port.
u In the TAG mode, the tags of
the uplink / downlink data
packets will not be processed
when they pass the port.
tag
Configuring
Multicast ModeIGMP Mode
Configure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.Controlled mode
Configuring
IGMP Proxy IPIGMP Proxy IP
Configure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.10.26.10.1
Configuring
Multicast
Default VLAN
Default SVLAN
ID
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The
default multicast SVLAN ID should
be in the range of the uplink
SVLAN.
100
Default CVLAN
ID
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. Retain
the default value.
-
Version: B/1 6-21
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Configuring
Multicast
Profile
Profile IDAutomatically assigned by the
system.1
Profile NameConfigure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.a
Group AddressConfigure this item according to
the operator’s network planning.226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
AuthorityConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.Normal Normal Preview
Configure
multicast
group
parameters
Group AddressThe group address configured in
the multicast profile226.0.1.1 226.0.1.2 226.0.1.3
Group SVLAN
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. The
group SVLAN should be in the
range of the uplink SVLAN.
100 200 100
Group CVLAN
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. Retain
the default value.
- - -
Preview Count
(Times)
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator.- - 5
Preview TimeConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.- - 10
Preview IntervalConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.- - 20
Preview ResetConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.- - 24
Preview Total
Time
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator.- - 50
Configure
multicast port
parameters
Slot No.The number of the slot actually
used by the VD32 card.3
Port No.The number of the port actually
used by the VD32 card.1 2
Control switch
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. Select
controlled mode.
Controllable
Multicast ModeThe profile name configured in the
multicast profilea
6-22 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Table 6-2 Planning Data of Multicast Service in the Controlled Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Max Online
Groups (Group)
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. Retain
the default value.
32
Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/b)
Configure according to the network
planning of the operator. Retain
the default value.
0
Fast leaveConfigure according to the network
planning of the operator.NON FAST LEAVE
Configuring a
Port Service
VLAN
Slot No.The number of the slot actually
used by the VD32 card.3
Port No.The number of the port actually
used by the VD32 card.1 2
Service Type The actual service type Multicast
CVLAN Mode
Configure the VLAN tag
processing mode of the ADSL port
according to the network planning
of the operator.
u TAG: Configures a VLAN
tagging to the received data.
u Translation: Translates the
original VLAN ID to one
compliant with the operator's
rules.
u Transparent: Transmits the
received data directly.
Transparent
CVLAN ID
Configure the received VLAN ID
according to the network planning
of the operator.
100, 200
Enabling the
VDSL Port
Slot No.The number of the slot actually
used by the VD32 card.3
Port No.The number of the port actually
used by the VD32 card.1 2
ENABLEFLAG Port Enable Enable
Version: B/1 6-23
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6.2.46.2.4 Configuration Flow
Figure 6-19 Configuration Flow in the Controlled Mode
6.2.56.2.5 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast PacketSuppression
Disable the multicast packet suppression function of the uplink port.
6-24 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíBroadcast Strom
Suppression to bring up the Broadcast Strom Suppression tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Disabling the Uplink Port Multicast Packet Suppression
6.2.66.2.6 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
Process the tag of the uplink VLAN via the uplink port. The user services within the
VLAN ID range are transmitted to the upper level network via this uplink port
according to the VLAN tag properties, and vice versa.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Port Service VLAN
to open the MCU Port Service VLAN tab.
4. Click the Add button on the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears, type 1 and click OK to add a service VLAN entry.
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
Version: B/1 6-25
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 Configuring the Uplink Service VLAN
6.2.76.2.7 Configuring the Multicast Mode
Configure the equipment's working mode to implement the multicast service.
Note:
Under the controllable mode, the VD32 card works in the controllable
mode, whereas the management control card, as the proxy of the user
interface card, manages subscribers' authorities to view or preview the
programs.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.
ConfigíIGMP Mode to access the IGMP Mode tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22 Configuring the Controllable Multicast Mode
6-26 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
6.2.86.2.8 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress
Configure the multicast proxy IP address of the equipment. This IP address will be
used as the source IP address of the multicast protocol message transmitted by the
equipment.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Proxy IP to
open the IGMP Proxy IP tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Configuring the Multicast Proxy IPAddress in the Controllable Mode
6.2.96.2.9 Configuring the Default Multicast VLAN
Configure the multicast VLAN information and designate a VLAN path for the
multicast service.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast VLANí
Multicast VLAN to bring up the Multicast VLAN tab.
Version: B/1 6-27
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data concerned.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-24.
Figure 6-24 Configuring Default Multicast VLAN in the Controllable Mode
6.2.106.2.10 Configuring the Multicast Profile
Configure the authority of watching programs for a specified multicast group.
Note:
The first row is the blank by default and can not be modified. When
configuring the IGMP Port Parameters, if the user port is not required to
be bound with the multicast profile, the empty profile should be selected.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíMulticast Profile &
PortíMulticast Profile.
4. In the left pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to create a new multicast
profile.
5. In the right pane, click Add on the toolbar, and enter 3 in the Enter the number
of rows to add dialog box that appears. Click OK to add three entries.
6. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
7. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-25.
6-28 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Figure 6-25 Configuring the Multicast Profile
6.2.116.2.11 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters
Configure basic parameters of the multicast group, including group SVLAN, preview
count, preview duration, and preview interval, etc.
Note:
Retain the default preview values of the multicast groups 226.0.1.1 and
226.0.1.2. Only when the multicast groups are in the preview mode can
the preview parameters become valid.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.
ConfigíIGMP Group Parameters to access the IGMP Group Parameters
tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-26.
Version: B/1 6-29
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-26 Configuring Multicast Group Parameters
6.2.126.2.12 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters
Configure the multicast port parameters, including control switch, multicast group
profile, maximum number of online groups, port bandwidth, etc.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Multicast ServiceíIGMP Param.
ConfigíIGMP Port Parameters to access the IGMP Port Parameters tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27 Configuring Multicast Port Parameters
6-30 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
6.2.136.2.13 Configuring the Port Service VLAN
Configure the service VLAN of the designated port on the VD32 card of the
equipment.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíPort VLAN Config to
open the Port VLAN Config tab.
4. Click VD32 in the left pane, and click PVC Index in the upper-right pane. Then
select ports 1 and 2 at the same time, as shown in Figure 6-28.
Figure 6-28 Selecting Ports in the Controllable Mode
5. Click the Add button, and in the Please Select Port & PVC dialog box that
appears, click the >> button to add all the ports to the Selected pane, as shown
in Figure 6-29.
Version: B/1 6-31
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-29 Selecting the Ports and the PVC to be Added with Data
6. Click OK, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box that
appears. Then click OK and return to the Port VLAN Config window.
7. Click the first row in the lower right pane, and then click the Batch Modify
button.
8. In the Batch Modify dialog box that appears, select CVLAN Settings.
9. In the Configuration Item group box, select the line VLAN ID, entering 100 in
the Initial Value field and 1 in the step field.
Note:
When the VLAN ID values increase or decrease regularly, set the Step to
the difference between two successive values. The item Redo refers to
the count of repeated values prior to calculation of the increment.
10. Select the line Priority or COS, and select 0 from the Initial Value drop-down
list. Use the default values for other parameters.
6-32 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
11. Select the line TPID, and enter 33024 in the Initial Value field. Use default
values for other parameters, as shown in Figure 6-30.
Figure 6-30 Modifying the CVLAN Settings in a Batch Manner in the Controllable Mode
12. Configure other parameters according to the planning data.
13. Return to the Port VLAN Config window, and click the Create on Device
button on the toolbar to complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 6-31.
Version: B/1 6-33
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-31 The Port Service VLAN Configuration Completed in the Controllable Mode
6.2.146.2.14 Enabling the VDSL Ports
Enable the ports of the VD32 card. Users can not configure the parameters for the
ports when they are disabled.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíPort ConfigíPort
Enable. Select the VD32 card to be configured in the Select Object window
that appears, and then click OK.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 6-32.
6-34 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
Figure 6-32 Enabling the VDSL Ports (Completed)
6.2.156.2.15 Configuration Result
After completing the configuration of multicast services in the controllable mode,
check the equipment status as follows.
6.2.15.16.2.15.1 Viewing Online Multicast Group Information
View the online multicast group information in the current multicast mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíMC Group Statistics in
the Operational Tree pane.
4. In the left pane, select the group addresses 226.0.1.1 and 226.0.1.2
respectively and click Read from Device on the toolbar to read the current
online multicast group information. It shows that two subscribers are watching
the two multicast programs, as shown in Figure 6-33.
Version: B/1 6-35
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-33 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Normal User
5. Select the group address 226.0.1.3 in the left pane and click Read from
Device on the toolbar to read the current online multicast group information. It
shows that two subscribers are watching the multicast program, as shown in
Figure 6-34.
Figure 6-34 Checking the Online Multicast Group Information for a Preview User
6.2.15.26.2.15.2 Viewing Online Group Information of Appointed Port
View the online multicast group information at port 1 of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the
current multicast mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. Select Get InformationíIGMP Param. InformationíOnline IGMP Group
Information For Specific Port in the Operational Tree pane.
6-36 Version: B/1
6 Configuring the Multicast Service
4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3. Then double-click
the Port No. field, and enter 1.
5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the online multicast group
information at the specified port. See Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Viewing the Online Group Information of a Specified Port in the Controllable Mode
6.2.15.36.2.15.3 Viewing the Core Switch Card's Multicast Address Table
View the manage control card's multicast address table in the current multicast
mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.
InformationíMCU MC Address Table.
4. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the multicast address table of
the core switch card. See Figure 6-36.
Version: B/1 6-37
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 6-36 Checking the MCU Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controlled Mode
6.2.15.46.2.15.4 Viewing the Multicast Address Table of the Line Card
View the multicast address table of the VD32 card in slot 3 in the current multicast
mode.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíIGMP Param.
InformationíLine Card MC Address Table.
4. In the left pane, double-click the Slot No. field and enter 3.
5. Click Read from Device in the toolbar to read the line card's multicast address
table. See Figure 6-37.
Figure 6-37 Checking the Line Card’s Multicast Address Table in the Controllable Mode
6-38 Version: B/1
77 Card Software Upgrade
The following introduces how to upgrade the software of cards for the AN5006-20.
Precautions
Upgrading the Management Control Card
Upgrading the Line Card
Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
Version: B/1 7-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
7.17.1 Precautions
Card rebooting is required during upgrade, which may affect the service concerned.
The operators should follow the instructions given below to minimize the impact on
the service.
u It is advised to carry out the upgrade at night when service traffic is at a
relatively low volume.
u Ensure the proper connection between the management VLAN port of the
AN5006-20 and the FTP server. The IP address of the management VLAN and
that of the FTP server are in the same subnet, and users can use the Ping
command on the FTP server to test its connectivity with the equipment before
upgrade operations.
u Save the current software version before the upgrade for fear the upgrade may
fail or the new version may encounter a major problem.
u The file type used for the upgrade should match the card type; otherwise the
upgrade may fail.
u Upgrade the service interface card first and then the management control card,
if both types need upgrade.
7.27.2 Upgrading the Management Control Card
The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card for the
AN5006-20.
7.2.17.2.1 Upgrade Rules
The management control card must be rebooted after upgrade. Therefore, it is
necessary to save the current configuration to the management control card's Flash
and back up the current configuration and the system software to the FTP server.
7.2.27.2.2 Planning Data
The following introduces upgrading the software of the MCUA card as an example.
7-2 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
The planning data for upgrading the management control card software are shown
in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card
Item Description Example
Related parameters of the card to
be upgraded
The number of the slot
accommodating the
actually used core switch
card
Core switch card in Slot 05
FTP server IPThe IP address of the FTP
server that is actually used10.92.20.168
FTP usernameThe user name of the FTP
server that is actually used1
FTP passwordThe password of the FTP
server that is actually used1
Backing up the
current
configuration
file
Task NameConfigure the file name in
actual use.system
Execution type
Set the cycle to execute
this task. Users can select
one time or a cycle.
One time
Extend
Information
Select the name of the
used FTP server.ftp
Repeated Time 2
Backing up the
system
software
Task NameConfigure the file name in
actual use.config
Execution type
Set the cycle to execute
this task. Users can select
one time or a cycle.
One time
Extend
Information
Select the name of the
used FTP server.ftp
Upgrading the
management
control card
software
Task NameConfigure the file name in
actual use.upgrade
Object source
The card to be upgraded.
Select the core switch
card.
MCUA[5]
Execution type
Set the cycle to execute
this task. Users can select
one time or a cycle.
One time
Extend
Information
Select the name of the
used FTP server.ftp
Version: B/1 7-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 7-1 Planning Data for Upgrading the Management Control Card (Continued)
Item Description Example
Select or enter the name of
the upgrade file.MCU.bin
7.2.37.2.3 Upgrade Flow
The flow of upgrading the management control card is shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Flow of Upgrading the Management Control Card
7.2.47.2.4 Saving Current Configuration to Flash
Users can save the configuration data into the FLASH to restore the equipment
configuration in case the upgrade fails or the new version has encountered a
problem.
7-4 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíSave Config to Flash
to bring up the Issue the command dialog box, as shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Saving the Configuration into the Flash
4. Click OK, and the system begins to execute the command.
5. After the data saving is completed, click the Close button.
7.2.57.2.5 Backing up the Current Configuration File
Back up all the current configuration files. In case that the upgrade fails, you can
use the backup configuration file to restore the equipment to the state before
upgrade.
Procedure
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
Version: B/1 7-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíConfiguration Export Task,
and click Create to open the Create Configuration Export Task dialog box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 Backing up the Current Configuration Data
7.2.67.2.6 Backing up the System Software
Back up the current system software. The system can restore to the software status
before upgrading in case the upgrade fails or a fault occurs in the upgrade version.
Procedure
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
2. In the left pane, select Configuration BackupíSoftware Backup Task, and
click Create to open the Create Software Backup Task dialog box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
4. Click Execute Now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-4 Backing up the System Software
7.2.77.2.7 Upgrading the Management Control Card Software
The following introduces how to upgrade the management control card's software.
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and
click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.
7-6 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Upgrading the Management Control Card
7.2.87.2.8 Resetting the Management Control Card
Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the
Reset dialog box.
4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,
as shown in Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-6 Resetting the Management Control Card
7.2.97.2.9 Checking the Software Version of the ManagementControl Card
Check whether the software version of the management control card is correct after
upgrade.
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 7-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open
the Card Version tab.
4. Check whether the software version of the management control card in slot 5 is
correct, as shown in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 Checking the Software Version of the Management Control Card
7.37.3 Upgrading the Line Card
The following introduces how to upgrade the line cards for the AN5006-20.
7.3.17.3.1 Upgrade Rules
Upgrade the software of line cards, including the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card, and the VDSL interface card.
u The cards of the same type can be upgraded in a batch manner.
u The procedures of upgrading the POTS card, the ADSL interface card and the
VDSL interface card are the same.
u The downloaded file types are different for the POTS card, the ADSL interface
card and the VDSL interface card. See Table 7-2 for the association between
the upgrade object and the downloaded file type.
Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type
Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type
POTS POTS64 Software
POTS32 POTS32 Software
VD32 AD32 Software
AD64 AD64 Software
VD32 VD32 Software
7-8 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
Table 7-2 Association between Upgrade Object and Download File Type (Continued)
Upgrade Object Downloaded File Type
CASA CASA
HDT8A HDT8A
HDT8B HDT8B
HD32A HD32A
7.3.27.3.2 Planning Data
The following illustrates how to upgrade the software of the AD64 cards in slots 2
and 4 as an example. See Table 7-3 for the planning data.
Table 7-3 Planning Data for Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software
Item Description Example
Related parameters of the card to be
upgraded
Configure according to the number of the
actually used slot for the service interface
card.
The ADSL64 cards in
slots 2 and 4.
Upgrading the
ADSL Interface
Card
Basic Information
The file name that is actually used. AD64
Set the cycle to execute this task. Users
can select one time or a cycle.One time
Object source Select the card to be upgraded. AD64 card
Extend InformationSelect the name of the used FTP server. ftp
File name. AD64.bin
7.3.37.3.3 Upgrade Flow
The flow of upgrading the ADSL interface card software is shown in Figure 7-8.
Version: B/1 7-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 7-8 The Flow of Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software
7.3.47.3.4 Upgrading the ADSL Interface Card Software
Procedure
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíBatch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card, and click Create to bring up the Batch Upgrade Task of the Service
Card dialog box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
4. Click Execute now to complete the configuration. See Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 Upgrading Software of the ADSL Interface Card in a Batch Manner
7-10 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
7.3.57.3.5 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the
Reset tab.
4. Click the Slot No field, select the slot where the upgraded ADSL interface card
is located from the drop-down list, and click Create on Device on the toolbar to
complete the configuration, as shown in Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Resetting the ADSL Interface Card
7.3.67.3.6 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL InterfaceCard
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open
the Card Version tab, as shown in Figure 7-11.
Figure 7-11 Checking the Software Version of the ADSL Interface Card
Version: B/1 7-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
7.47.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUACard
The following introduceshow to upgrade the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.
7.4.17.4.1 Upgrade Rule
The management control card will be reset after the uplink subcard of the MCUA
card is upgraded. Therefore, it is necessary to save the current configuration to the
management control card's flash and back up the current configuration to the FTP
server.
7.4.27.4.2 Planning Data
Table 7-4 shows the planning data for upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA
card.
Table 7-4 Planning Data for Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
Item Description Example
Downloaded file type Select the E1 uplink subcard E1 uplink subcard
FTP server IP Configure according to the actual conditions. 10.78.20.122
FTP server username Configure according to the actual conditions. 1
FTP server password Configure according to the actual conditions. 1
File NameConfigure according to the actual conditions. The file
name should include no more than 20 characters.V5_RP0101
7.4.37.4.3 Upgrade Flow
Figure 7-12 shows the flow of upgrading the uplink subcard of the MCUA card.
7-12 Version: B/1
7 Card Software Upgrade
Figure 7-12 Flow of Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
7.4.47.4.4 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
2. In the left pane, select Upgrade TaskíSystem Software Upgrade Task and
click Create to open the Create System Software Update Task dialog box.
3. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
4. Click Execute now, as shown in Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 Upgrading the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
7.4.57.4.5 Resetting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
Reboot the management control card to validate the upgrade configurations.
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 7-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the
Reset dialog box.
4. Select reset core card from the drop-down list of Slot No. field.
5. Click Create on Device on the toolbar to reset the management control card,
as shown in Figure 7-14.
Figure 7-14 Rebooting the Uplink Subcard of the MCUA Card
7.4.67.4.6 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's UplinkSubcard
The following introduces how to check the software version of the MCUA card's
uplink subcard after upgrading.
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíCard Version to open
the Card Version tab.
4. Check whether the software version of the MCUA card's uplink subcard in Slot
802 is correct, as shown in Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15 Viewing Software Version of the MCUA Card's Uplink Subcard
7-14 Version: B/1
88 Configuring Link Aggregation
The following introduces differences between the AN5006-20 manual link
aggregation mode and the static LACP aggregation mode and the configure method
of the two link aggregations.
Configuration Example of Manual Aggregation Mode
Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode
Version: B/1 8-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
8.18.1 Configuration Example of ManualAggregation Mode
The following introduces how to configure manual aggregation mode.
8.1.18.1.1 Configuration Rules
u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual or static
LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.
u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.
u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.
8.1.28.1.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up a manual
aggregation port group.
Network Diagram
Taking the MCUA card as an example, see Figure 8-1 for the manual aggregation
network diagram.
8-2 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
Figure 8-1 Manual Aggregation Network Diagram
The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are connected to the upper layer
switch and the ports are added manually to the aggregation group via the network
management system, so as to achieve load sharing in the aggregation group. When
one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other links in
the aggregation group.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable manual port aggregation.
8.1.38.1.3 Planning Data
Table 8-1 shows the planning data of the manual aggregation mode.
Version: B/1 8-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 8-1 Planning Data of Manual Aggregation Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the
properties of the
Ethernet ports of
the management
control card
Slot No.The slot number of the management control
card in actual use.5
Port No.The port number of the management control
card in actual use.GE3 GE4
Auto-negotiationEnables or disables the auto-negotiation of the
Ethernet port.Disable
RateThe Ethernet port and the GE port support rates
of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.1000M
Duplex
Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The
mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex
mode. Duplex mode is used by default.
Full duplex
Flow controlEnables or disables the flow control function of
the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.Disable
Port address
learning
Enables or disables the address learning
function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.Enable
Port priorityEnables or disables the port priority function.
Enabled by default.Enable
Port priority value
The service priority value of the Ethernet port,
ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while
0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.
0
Interface mode
The interface mode of the Ethernet port;
includes SerDes and SGMII. The default value
is SerDes. When the Ethernet port uses the
optical module or forced GE electrical module,
the SerDes mode is configured. When the
Ethernet port uses the 10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps
electrical mode, the SMGII mode is configured.
SerDes
Configuring link
aggregation
groups
Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate
groups; automatically generated by the system.1
Mode
Configure the link aggregation mode of the
AN5006-20 according to the network planning of
the operator.
Manual Aggregation
Configuring the
Aggregation Port
Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate
groups; automatically generated by the system.1
Member Port
Number
Add the group member port to the LAG
manually according to the network planning of
the operator.
GE3 GE4
8-4 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
8.1.48.1.4 Configuration Flow
See Figure 8-2 for the configuration flow of the manual aggregation.
Figure 8-2 Flow of Configuring Manual Aggregation
8.1.58.1.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the ManagementControl Card
Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to
open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-3.
Version: B/1 8-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 8-3 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Manual
Aggregation
8.1.68.1.6 Configuring the Aggregation Mode
The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí
Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Manual Aggregation
8.1.78.1.7 Configuring the Aggregation Ports
Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the manual
aggregation group.
8-6 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí
Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Manual Aggregation
8.1.88.1.8 Configuration Result
The traffic will achieve load sharing automatically on the uplink ports GE3 and GE4
of the link aggregation group on the MCUA card. If one physical link is faulty, traffic
can automatically switch to the other links of the aggregation group.
8.28.2 Configuration Example of Static LACPAggregation Mode
The following introduces how to configure the static LACP aggregation mode.
8.2.18.2.1 Configuration Rules
u Two aggregation modes are applicable to the AN5006-20: manual and static
LACP. Users need to configure only one of them.
u The AN5006-20 supports two aggregation groups.
Version: B/1 8-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
u An aggregation group may have 2 to 4 member ports.
8.2.28.2.2 Network Diagram
Service Planning
The GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card on the AN5006-20 make up an LACP
aggregation port group.
Network Diagram
The network of the static LACP aggregation is shown in Figure 8-6. Here the MCUA
card is taken as an example.
Figure 8-6 Static LACPAggregation Network Diagram
8-8 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
Connect the GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card with the upper layer
switch, enable the LACP function and add the ports manually to the LAG. The
equipment and the switch determine the link aggregation ports via LACP interaction.
When one of the physical links fails, traffic can be automatically switched to other
links in the aggregation group.
Hardware Configuration
The equipment uses the MCUA card to enable LACP port aggregation.
8.2.38.2.3 Planning Data
See Table 8-2 for the planning data of static LACP aggregation mode.
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode
Item Description Example
Configuring the
properties of the
Ethernet ports of
the management
control card
Slot No.The slot number of the management control card
in actual use.5
Port No.The port number of the management control card
in actual use.GE3 GE4
Auto-negotiationEnables or disables the auto-negotiation of the
Ethernet port.Disable
RateThe Ethernet port and the GE port support rates
of 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbps.1000M
Duplex
Sets the duplex mode of the uplink port. The
mode includes full duplex mode and half duplex
mode. Duplex mode is used by default.
Full duplex
Flow controlEnables or disables the flow control function of
the Ethernet port. The default value is Disable.Disable
Port address
learning
Enables or disables the address learning
function of the Ethernet port. Enabled by default.Enable
Port priorityEnables or disables the port priority function.
Enabled by default.Enable
Port priority value
The service priority value of the Ethernet port,
ranging from 0 to 7. 7 is the highest priority while
0 is the lowest priority. The default setting is 0.
0
Version: B/1 8-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 8-2 Planning Data of Static LACPAggregation Mode (Continued)
Item Description Example
Interface mode
The interface mode of the Ethernet port; includes
SerDes and SGMII. The default value is SerDes.
When the Ethernet port uses the optical module
or forced GE electrical module, the SerDes mode
is configured. When the Ethernet port uses the
10 / 100 / 1000 Mbps electrical mode, the SMGII
mode is configured.
SerDes
Configuring
LACP global
parameters
LACP switch Enable the static LACP switch Enable
System priority
Configure the system priority of the AN5006-20
according to the network planning of the
operator.
32768
System ID The CPU MAC address of the AN5006-20 00-0a-c2-88-77-44
Configuring
LACP port
parameters
Port No.
Configure the port number of the link aggregation
according to the network planning of the
operator.
GE3 GE4
Port priority The default setting is 32768. 32768
Operation key The default setting is 1. 1
TimerConfigure the port timer type according to the
network planning of the operator.Long Timeout
Configuring link
aggregation
groups
Group IDThe AN5006-20 Supports two link aggregate
groups; automatically generated by the system.1
Mode
Configure the link aggregation mode of the
AN5006-20 according to the network planning of
the operator.
Static LACP
Configuring the
Aggregation Port
Group IDThe AN5006-20 supports two link aggregate
groups; automatically generated by the system.1
Member Port
Number
Add the member GE port to the LAG manually
according to the network planning of the
operator.
GE3 GE4
8.2.48.2.4 Configuration Flow
The configuration flow of the static LACP aggregation mode is shown in Figure 8-7.
8-10 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
Figure 8-7 Configuration Flow of Static LACPAggregation
8.2.58.2.5 Configuring the Ethernet Port of the ManagementControl Card
Configure the properties of the GE3 and GE4 ports on the MCUA card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Data ServiceíMCU Ethernet Port to
open the MCU Ethernet Port tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-8.
Version: B/1 8-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 8-8 Configuring the Ethernet Ports of the Management Control Card - Static LACP
Aggregation
8.2.68.2.6 Configuring LACP Global Parameters
The following introduces how to configure the LACP function of the AN5006-20.
When the LACP function is enabled, the equipment will run the LACP, perform
protocol interaction with the uplink switch and determine the link aggregation ports.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP
Global Config to bring up the LACP Global Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Configuring LACP Global Parameters
8-12 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
8.2.78.2.7 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters
The following introduces how to configure the LACP parameters of the aggregation
ports.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationíLACP
Port Config to bring up the LACP Port Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-10.
Figure 8-10 Configuring the LACP Port Parameters
8.2.88.2.8 Configuring the Aggregation Mode
The following introduces how to configure the aggregation mode of the aggregation
group for the AN5006-20.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
Version: B/1 8-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí
Aggregation Group to bring up the Aggregation Group tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 Configuring Aggregation Mode - Static LACPAggregation
8.2.98.2.9 Configuring the Aggregation Ports
Set the GE3 and GE4 ports of the MCUA card to the member ports of the static
LACP aggregation group manually.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Ethernet ConfigíAggregationí
Aggregation Port Config to bring up the Aggregation Port Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 8-12.
Figure 8-12 Configuring Aggregation Ports - Static LACPAggregation
8-14 Version: B/1
8 Configuring Link Aggregation
8.2.108.2.10 Configuration Result
The GE3 and GE4 uplink ports of the MCUA card are added to the static LACP
aggregation group manually. And the equipment runs the LACP, performs protocol
interaction with the uplink switch and determines the link aggregation ports.
Version: B/1 8-15
99 Configuring the Power andEnvironment Monitoring
The following introduces how to configure the power supply and environment
monitoring for the AN5006-20.
Configuring Environment Monitoring
Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters
Configuring the Charging Mode
Resetting the HCU-20 Card
Enabling the Rectifier Module
Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card
Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card
Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20 Card
Version: B/1 9-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
9.19.1 Configuring Environment Monitoring
The following introduces how to configure environment monitoring.
9.1.19.1.1 Configuration Rules
u An HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card can be bound to only one
threshold profile, while a threshold profile can be bound to multiple ports.
u The alarms are divided into two categories: status alarms and threshold alarms.
4 The status alarms are reported by the HCU-20 card indicating abnormal
state of the system.
4 As for the threshold alarms, users can set the alarm threshold values via
the threshold profile, and the system compares its performance values
with the threshold values to decide whether to report the alarms or clear
the alarms.
u Table 9-1 shows the relationship among the alarm codes, alarm report
threshold ranges and default values, and alarm clearing threshold ranges and
default values.
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters
Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold
Setting
Alarm Clearing Threshold
SettingUnit
HUM_DOWNThreshold
alarm
[0.00,19.90]; the default value is
0.00.
[0.00,19.90]; the default value is
0.00.%RH
ENV_TEMP_
DOWN
Threshold
alarm
[0.00,19.90]; the default value is
0.00.
[0.00,19.90]; the default value is
0.00.⇤
HUM_OVERThreshold
alarm
[50.00,109.90]; the default value
is 90.00.
[50.00,109.90]; the default value is
90.00.%RH
ENV_TEMP_
OVER
Threshold
alarm
[35.00,70.00]; the default value
is 55.00.
[35.00,70.00]; the default value is
55.00.⇤
ACVOLOVERThreshold
alarm
[230.00,300.00]; the default
value is 280.00.
[230.00,300.00]; the default value
is 280.00.V
ACVOLDOWNThreshold
alarm
[130.00,220.00]; the default
value is 170.00.
[130.00,220.00]; the default value
is 170.00.V
DCVOLOVERThreshold
alarm
[55.00,58.50]; the default value
is 57.00.
[55.00,58.50]; the default value is
57.00.V
9-2 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)
Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold
Setting
Alarm Clearing Threshold
SettingUnit
DCVOLDOWNThreshold
alarm
[42.00,50.00]; the default value
is 45.00.
[42.00,50.00]; the default value is
45.00.V
OVERCURREThreshold
alarm
[10.00,39.90]; the default value
is 30.00.
[10.00,39.90]; the default value is
30.00.A
BDCVLOVERThreshold
alarm
[50.00,69.90]; the default value
is 59.00.
[50.00,69.90]; the default value is
59.00.V
BDCVLDOWNThreshold
alarm
[43.00,49.00]; the default value
is 45.00.
[43.00,49.00]; the default value is
45.00.V
RETEMP-
OVER
Threshold
alarm
[40.00,90.00]; the default value
is 80.00.
[40.00,90.00]; the default value is
80.00.⇤
BATTERY_
TEMPERA-
TURE_OVER_
THRESHOLD_
ALARM
Threshold
alarm
[40.00,89.90]; the default value
is 60.00.
[40.00,89.90]; the default value is
60.00.⇤
ARRESTER_
BREAK
Status
alarm- - -
FIRE_ALARMStatus
alarm- - -
DOOR_
ACCESS
Status
alarm- - -
BATTERY_
FUSE_BREAK
Status
alarm- - -
LOAD_FUSE_
BREAK
Status
alarm- - -
AC_
BREAKER_
OPEN
Status
alarm- - -
RECTIFIER_
MODULE_
ALARM
Status
alarm- - -
FAN_ALARMStatus
alarm- - -
HEAT_ALARMStatus
alarm- - -
SHAKEStatus
alarm- - -
Version: B/1 9-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 9-1 Relationship among Alarm Codes, Alarm Report Threshold Parameters and Alarm
Clearing Threshold Parameters (Continued)
Alarm Code Alarm TypeAlarm Report Threshold
Setting
Alarm Clearing Threshold
SettingUnit
INFRARED_
DETECT_
ALARM
Status
alarm- - -
FLOODStatus
alarm- - -
SMOKEStatus
alarm- - -
AIR_
CONDITION-
ER_ALARM
Status
alarm- - -
AC_POWER_
FAIL
Status
alarm- - -
9.1.29.1.2 Planning Data
The following illustrates how to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an
example. See Table 9-2 for the planning data.
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance
Item Description Example
Configuring
the
threshold
profile
Profile ID Read only. -
Profile Name
Configure it according to actual situation. Maximum length:
20 characters. The acceptable character collection is 0 to 9,
a to z, A to Z and the underline.
test1
Object Class
Configure this item according to the planning of the
operator. The options include board and port.. When the
Object Class is set to None, the Object Type is null; when
the Object Class is set to other values, set the Object Type
to the one corresponding to the object class. For the
configuration of the equipment power supply and
environment monitoring, only two options are valid: Board
and Port.
Board
9-4 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)
Item Description Example
Object Type
Configure it according to actual situation.
If the Object Class is set to Board, the Object Type should
be set to HCU-20.
If the Object Class is set to Port, the Object Type should be
set to LINE-20.
HCU-20
Alarm Code
Configure this item according to the planning of the
operator.
If the Object Class is set to Board, the alarm code options
include HUM_DOWN, ENV_TEMP_DOWN, ACVOLOVER,
ACVOLDOWN, DCVOLOVER, DCVOLDOWN, HUM_
OVER, ENV_TEMP_OVER, etc.
If the Object Class is set to Port, the alarm code options
includeOVERCURRE, BDCVLOVER, BDCVLDOWN,
RETEMPOVER, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_OVER_
THRESHOLD_ALARM, BATTERY_TEMPERATURE_
DOWN_THRESHOLD_ALARM, etc.
ACVOLOVER
AlarmThresholdS-
witch
Configure the item according to the network planning of the
operator. The options are Enable and Disable.
When it is set to Enable, the NMS will deliver the threshold
profile parameters configured by the users to the equipment.
When it is set to Disable, the NMS will deliver the default
settings of the threshold profile to the equipment.
Enable
AlarmReportThres-
hold
If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,
the NMS will report the alarm when the performance value
of the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is higher
than the set value.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
NMS will report the alarm when the performance value of
the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than
the set value.
280.00
AlarmReportThre-
sholdRange
Read only. The alarm report threshold value should be set
within the alarm report threshold range.[230.00,300.00]
Version: B/1 9-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 9-2 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Instance (Continued)
Item Description Example
ClearingAlarm-
Threshold
If the alarm type is set to an overhigh performance value,
the NMS will clear the alarm when the performance value of
the HCU-20 card or a port on the HCU-20 card is lower than
the set value and display the alarm end time. The value of
the ClearingAlarmThreshold should be smaller than or equal
to the value of AlarmReportThreshold in this case.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
NMS will prompt that the alarm is cleared when the
performance value of the HCU-20 card or a port on the
HCU-20 card is higher than the set value. The value of the
ClearingAlarmThreshold should be larger than or equal to
the AlarmReportThreshold in this case.
If the AlarmReportThreshold and ClearingAlarmThreshold
are set to the same value, there is only one threshold value
for the alarm. If the alarm type is set to an overhigh
performance value, the alarm will be cleared when the
actual performance value is lower than the threshold value.
If the alarm type is set to an overlow performance value, the
alarm will be cleared when the actual performance value is
higher than the threshold value.
280.00
ClearingAlarmThre-
sholdRange
Read only. The clearing alarm threshold value should be set
within the clearing alarm threshold range.[230.00,300.00]
Binding the
threshold
profile
Object Name Select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card. HCU-20
Profile Name
The name of the existing threshold profile. For a bound
threshold profile, you can select Unbind from the drop-down
list to unbind it from the HCU-20 card or the port of the HCU-
20 card.
test1
9-6 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
9.1.39.1.3 Configuration Flow
Figure 9-1 Flow of Configuring Environment Alarm Instance
9.1.49.1.4 Configuring the Threshold Profile
This command is used to configure the alarm codes, the threshold values for
clearing and reporting the alarms of the threshold profile, and enable threshold
alarming by binding the profile to a card or a port.
Note:
A bound threshold profile cannot be deleted unless being unbound first.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold
Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile tab.
4. Click the blank area on the left side of the PM Threshold Profile tab, click the
Add button on the toolbar, and enter 1 in the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears. Then click OK.
Version: B/1 9-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
5. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
6. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Configuring the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile
9.1.59.1.5 Binding the Threshold Profile
This command is used to bind the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card or the port
on the HCU-20 card, so as to perform the threshold alarm. The following takes
binding the threshold profile to the HCU-20 card as an example.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Performance ManagementíThreshold
Profile and BindíPM Threshold Profile Bind to bring up the PM Threshold
Profile Bind tab.
4. One the left pane of the tab, select the HCU-20 card or a port on the card, and
then select test1 from the drop-down list of the corresponding profile name on
the right pane.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Binding the Environment Monitoring Threshold Profile
9-8 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
9.1.69.1.6 Configuration End
Configure a threshold profile with the alarm code ACVOLOVER (AC voltage
overhigh), and bind the profile with the HCU-20 card. When the AC voltage of the
card is higher than the set alarm report threshold, the NMS will report the alarm.
When the AC voltage of the card is lower than the set clearing alarm threshold, the
alarm will be cleared.
9.29.2 Configuring the Environment MonitoringParameters
Configure the parameters of the power system for the HCU-20 card to guarantee
normal operation of the power system and ensure reliability of the power supply.
The planning data for configuring the parameters of environment monitoring are
shown in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters
Item Description Example
Configuring the
environment
monitoring
parameters
Slot No.
Read-only. The HCU-20 card is managed as a
particular card with a dedicated slot number
801 in the network management system.
801
Batteryfill back
coefficient value
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
0.0
Batteryfill value
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
0.0
Batteryfill limit_current
value (A)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 8.0 (unit: A).
8.0
Batteryfill circle value
(H)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).
0.0
Batteryfill time value
(H)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).
0.0
Battery_fill time
stoptime (H)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0 (unit: H).
0.0
Version: B/1 9-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)
Item Description Example
temperature_
compensate_
coefficient
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
200.0, and the default value is 0.0.
0.0
Temperature Batteryfill
Basic (⇤)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to
30.0, and the default value is 25.0 (unit:⇤).
25.0
Volt Fill Adjust Value
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
0.0
Temperature Fill Adjust
Value
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 0.0.
0.0
Communte float
charge volt (V)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 45.0 to
57.0, and the default value is 54.0 (unit: V).
54.0
Communte equal
charge volt (V)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 52.0 to
58.5, and the default value is 55.0 (unit: V).
55.0
Communte num (Unit)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 0 to 12,
and the default value is 2 (unit: Unit).
2
Battery Capacity (AH)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 1.0 to
999.0, and the default value is 100.0 (unit:
AH).
100.0
Sound Alarm Switch
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. Two options are available:
"open" and "close".
close
Battery switch volt (V)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to
47.0, and the default value is 43.0 (unit: V).
43.0
Load switch volt (V)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 40.0 to
50.0, and the default value is 45.0 (unit: V).
45.0
Communte limit_
current value (A)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 2.0 to
50.0, and the default value is 11.0 (unit: A).
11.0
9-10 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
Table 9-3 Planning Data for Configuring the Environment Monitoring Parameters (Continued)
Item Description Example
Discharge turn EQ
voltage (V)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 43.0 to
51.0, and the default value is 48.0 (unit: V).
48.0
Discharge turn EQ
time (min)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 30.0 to
60.0, and the default value is 30.0 (unit: min).
30.0
Discharge turn EQ
capacity (%)
Configure this item according to the planning
of the operator. The value ranges from 10.0 to
90.0, and the default value is 60.0 (unit: %).
60.0
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíHCU Para Config to
open the HCU Para Config tab.
4. Configure the parameters according to the planning data.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Configuring Environment Monitoring Parameters
9.39.3 Configuring the Charging Mode
Configure the charging mode for the storage battery using the HCU-20 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
Version: B/1 9-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, selectCommon ConfigíCharging mode to
bring up the Charging mode tab.
4. Select the desired charging mode.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Configuring the Charging Mode
9.49.4 Resetting the HCU-20 Card
The following introduces how to reset the HCU-20 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select System ControlíReset to bring up the
Reset tab. Select reset card 801 from the drop-down list of the Slot No..
4. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 Resetting the HCU-20 Card
9.59.5 Enabling the Rectifier Module
The following introduces how to enable the rectifier module.
9-12 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common ConfigíRectifier module
enable to bring up the Rectifier module enable tab.
4. Double-click the Module No. field, fill in the number of the rectifier module to be
configured, and then select Enable or Disable.
5. Click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to complete the configuration,
as shown in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Enabling the Rectifier Module
9.69.6 Viewing the Instant Performance of the HCU-20 Card
The following introduces how to view the instant performance of the HCU-20 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Current
Performance from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current
Performance tab. Then you can check the instant performance of the current
HCU card. See Figure 9-8.
Version: B/1 9-13
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 9-8 Checking the Instant Performance of the HCU Card
9.79.7 Viewing Current Alarms of the HCU-20 Card
The following introduces how to view the current alarms of the HCU-20 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment Device, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Current Alarm tab.
Then you can check the alarms currently existing in the HCU card. See
Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9 Viewing the Current Alarms of the HCU Card
9-14 Version: B/1
9 Configuring the Power and Environment Monitoring
9.89.8 Viewing the Alarm History of the HCU-20Card
The following introduces how to view the alarm history of the HCU-20 card.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Right-click the HCU-20 card in the Equipment View, and select Alarm History
from the shortcut menu that appears to bring up the Alarm History tab. Then
you can check the alarm history of the HCU card. See Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10 Checking the Alarm History of the HCU Card
Version: B/1 9-15
1010 Test Function
The following introduces the subscriber line test function and the Ping test function
of the AN5006-20.
Subscriber Internal Line Test
Subscriber External Line Test
Ping Test
Version: B/1 10-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
10.110.1 Subscriber Internal Line Test
The following introduces how to configure the subscriber internal line test.
10.1.110.1.1 Test Rules
The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.
10.1.210.1.2 Signal Flow
The signal flow of the subscriber internal line test is shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Signal Flow of the Subscriber Internal Line Test
The signal flow in the subscriber internal line test is described as follows.
1. The UNM2000 delivers the internal line test command to the management
control card.
2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.
3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).
10-2 Version: B/1
10 Test Function
10.1.310.1.3 Test Procedure
Figure 10-2 shows the flow chart for the subscriber internal line test.
Figure 10-2 The Flow of Subscriber Internal Line Test
10.1.410.1.4 Configuring the Subscriber Internal Line Test
The internal line test can be used to check whether the POTS card is normal and
facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 4 as an
example.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up
the 112 Test tab.
4. Select the line with the port number 1, and then select Inline Test from the
drop-down list of the Test Mode field, and no force test from the Test Type
field.
5. Select the current line, and click the Create on Device button on the toolbar to
apply the configuration to the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-3.
Version: B/1 10-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 10-3 Configuring Subscriber Internal Line Test
10.1.510.1.5 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result
Check the result of the subscriber internal line test.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíInline Test to open the
Inline Test tab.
4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Checking the Subscriber Internal Line Test Result
10.1.610.1.6 Test Completed
The Test State has three options:
u completed: The test is completed.
u testing: The test is in progress.
u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.
10-4 Version: B/1
10 Test Function
Below are the two test results:
u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.
u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.
The parameters like Signal Tone State, Feeder Voltage State, and Loop Current
State are in either of the two states: normal or abnormal.
10.210.2 Subscriber External Line Test
The following introduces how to configure the subscriber external line test.
10.2.110.2.1 Test Rules
The tests can be divided into forcible and non-forcible tests. A forcible test will be
performed even when the user is in conversation, and the conversation will be
interrupted during the test. A non-forcible test will not be performed when the user is
in conversation. Usually a non-forcible test is recommended.
10.2.210.2.2 Signal Flow
Figure 10-5 shows the signal flow in the subscriber external line test.
Figure 10-5 Signal Flow of the Subscriber External Line Test
The signal flow in the subscriber external line test is described as follows.
1. The UNM2000 delivers the external line test command to the management
control card.
Version: B/1 10-5
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
2. The management control card receives the test command from the network
management system and checks the command parameters, including the
parameter range, and whether the line card is present and is the service card
supporting the voice function. If no fault exists, the management control card
will send the test command to the corresponding line card, and meanwhile
send the feedback information to the UNM2000, indicating that the test
command is successfully delivered.
3. Upon receiving the test command, the line card performs the line test. Each
time when it completes a port test, the line card will report to the management
control card that the test is completed (excluding the test result).
10.2.310.2.3 Test Procedure
Figure 10-6 shows the flow of subscriber external line test.
Figure 10-6 Flow of Subscriber External Line Test
10.2.410.2.4 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test
When a fault occurs in the subscriber telephone line, the external line test can be
implemented to check whether the physical connection of the POTS card is normal
and facilitate fault isolation. Here we take Port 1 of the POTS card in Slot 1 as an
example.
10-6 Version: B/1
10 Test Function
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Common Configí112 Test to bring up
the 112 Test tab.
4. Click the Add button in the toolbar. In the Enter the number of rows to add
dialog box that appears subsequently, type 1 and click OK to add a
configuration entry.
5. Double-click the Test Mode field and select OutLine Test from the drop-down
list.
6. Double-click the Test Type field and select no force test from the drop-down
list.
7. Click the Create on Device button in the toolbar to apply the configuration to
the equipment, as shown in Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Configuring the Subscriber External Line Test
10.2.510.2.5 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result
Check the 112 external line test result.
Procedure
1. Double-click the NE to be configured in Main Topology to open the NE
manager.
2. Select ConfigurationíLocal Service Configuration from the menu bar to
bring up the Local Service Config tab.
3. In the Operational Tree pane, select Get InformationíOutline Test to open
the Outline Test tab.
Version: B/1 10-7
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
4. In the Switch Object pane, select POTS64[1], and then select Port 1. The
equipment reads the configuration, as shown in Figure 10-8.
Figure 10-8 Checking the Subscriber External Line Test Result
10.2.610.2.6 Test Completed
The Test State has three options:
u completed: The test is completed.
u testing: The test is in progress.
u waiting: The UNM2000 has not yet issued the test command.
Below are the two test results:
u Succeed: The test is completed successfully.
u Refused: The test fails. The Refuse Reason is that the port is being tested or is
in use.
The Port Status and the corresponding fault causes are described as follows:
u normal: The subscriber line is connected with the phone.
u line break: The subscriber line is not connected with the phone and the port
status is abnormal.
u shorted: The subscriber line A is connected with the subscriber line B, and the
port status is abnormal.
u poor insulation: The subscriber line is grounded, and the port is in abnormal
status.
u Not hung up: The telephone is not hung up, and the port status is abnormal.
u Line interfere: The subscriber lines A and B are connected with the battery, and
the port status is abnormal.
10-8 Version: B/1
10 Test Function
10.310.3 Ping Test
The following introduces the purpose and procedures of the Ping test.
10.3.110.3.1 Test Purpose
The Ping test is used to check the network connectivity. The AN5006-20 transmits
the ICMP echo request message to the destination IP address, and reports whether
it has received the desired ICMP echo reply. It can be learned from the test result
whether two network devices are well connected as well as the information such as
packet loss rate and network delay.
10.3.210.3.2 Ping Test
The following introduces how to implement the Ping test.
Procedure
1. Click the NE to be configured in the Main Topology pane. Select Systemí
Policy Task Management to open the Policy Task Management tab.
2. In the left pane, select Test TaskíVOIP PING Task, and click Create to open
the Create VOIP PING Task dialog box.
3. In the Parameter Settings group box, enter the destination IP address in the
Destination IP text box, as shown in Figure 10-9.
Version: B/1 10-9
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure 10-9 Configuring the Ping Test Parameters
Note:
See Table 10-1 for Ping test parameters.
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters
Parameter Title
-nSelect this check box and set the quantity of Tx packets in the text box. The value ranges from 0
to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4.
-wSelect this check box and set the timeout interval of the waiting period in the text box. The value
ranges from 0 to 4 294 967 295 and the default value is 4000; unit: ms.
-lSelect this check box and set the size of the packet in the text box (unit: byte). The value ranges
from 0 to 65 500 and the default value is 32.
-iSelect this check box and set the TTL value in the text box. The value ranges from 1 to 255 and
the default value is 128.
-vSelect this check box and set the TOS value in the text box. The value ranges from 0 to 255 and
the default value is 0.
10-10 Version: B/1
10 Test Function
Table 10-1 Ping Test Parameters (Continued)
Parameter Title
-rSelect this check box and set the hop count of the routers sending and receiving packets in the
text box. The value ranges from 1 to 9 and the default value is 1.
-s
Select this check box and set the timeslot of the route hop count in the text box. It is similar to -r,
but does not record the route via which the packet returns. The value ranges from 1 to 4, and the
default value is 1.
-tSelect this check box and the user can ping the designated computer until pressing down Ctrl + C
to terminate.
-a Select this check box to resolve the address to the host name.
-fSelect this check box to set "no-segmentation" of the data packet, so that the packet will not be
segmented by gateway of the route.
-j
Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host
IP" group box. Consecutive computers can be separated by intermediate gateways (loose source
route). Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.
-k
Select this check box to list the route of the packet based on the designated computer in the "Host
IP" group box. Consecutive computers cannot be separated by the intermediate gateway (route
strict source) Up to 9 host IP addresses can be configured.
4. Click OK and return to the VOIP PING Test window.
5. Click Execute Now and the test result will be displayed in the right pane, as
shown in Figure 10-10.
Figure 10-10 Ping Test
10.3.310.3.3 Viewing the Test Result
After the Ping test is completed, the test result will be displayed in the right pane of
the VOIP PING Task window, and you can check the following items.
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result
Item Description
Object Info The equipment to execute the Ping command.
Destination IP The IP address of the destination host
Send Message Number The number of ICMP packets transmitted by the equipment
Version: B/1 10-11
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Table 10-2 Ping Test Result (Continued)
Item Description
Number of Received Packets The number of ICMP packets received by the equipment
Maximum Delay The maximum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received
Minimum Delay The minimum interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received
Average Delay Time The average interval for an ICMP packet to be transmitted and received
Packet Loss Rate The ratio of the lost data packets to the total number of data packets transmitted
10-12 Version: B/1
Appendix A FTP Operation Guide
The following introduces the functions and procedures of the FTP operations.
A.1A.1 Function Overview
Connect the computer with the equipment using the network cable, and set up the
FTP server end on the computer; that is, install the WFTP software. During
equipment upgrade, the equipment obtains the upgrade package from the FTP
server in the FTP mode. During equipment backup, the equipment exports the
backup files to the FTP server end in the FTP mode.
A.2A.2 Procedure
The following uses an example to describe how to use the WFTP software. Create
an FTP user with the user name 1 and the password 1, and set the path for saving
the upgrade / backup package to d:\ftp.
Procedure
1. At the FTP server end, set the path for saving the upgrade / backup package to
d:\ftp.
2. Open the WFTP window, as shown in Figure A-1.
Figure A -1 Opening the WFTP Software
Version: B/1 A-1
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
3. Click SecurityíUsers/Rights in the menu bar to start user configuration, as
shown in Figure A-2.
Figure A -2 Accessing the User Configuration GUI
4. In the User/Rights Security Dialog window that appears, click the New User
button to create a new FTP user. This user account will be used in upgrading
and backup later on. Enter the username 1, as shown in Figure A-3.
Note:
Click the Delete button to delete an existing user, or select an existing
user and click the Change Password button to modify the user’s
password.
Figure A -3 Adding New FTP User and Setting the User Name to 1
A-2 Version: B/1
Appendix A FTP Operation Guide
5. Click the OK button, enter the password 1, and click OK to create a new user,
as shown in Figure A-4.
Figure A -4 Entering User Password 1
6. Enter the directory where the upgrade package / backup package is saved in
the Home Directory field in the User/Rights Security Dialog window. Type
d:\ftp according to the directory setting in Step1, as shown in Figure A-5.
Figure A -5 Enter the Directory of Upgrade Package / Backup Package
7. Click the Done button to complete the configuration.
8. Click LoggingíLog options in the No log file open window to set the log
function of the WFTP tool, as shown in Figure A-6.
Version: B/1 A-3
AN5006-20 Small-Sized Integrated Access Device MSAN Configuration Guide
Figure A -6 Configuring Log Function of the WFTP Tool
9. Select all the check boxes exceptWinsock Calls in the Logging Options
window, as shown in Figure A-7.
Figure A -7 Logging Options
10. Click the OK button to display the logs. Users can isolate faults using the log
information and determine whether the gets or puts operation is successful
according to the log displayed in the WFTP window.
Now the WFTP configuration is completed.
A-4 Version: B/1
Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company
To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.
Documentation Name
Code and Version
Usage of the product documentation:
1. How often do you use the documentation?
° Frequently ° Rarely ° Never ° Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
° in starting up a project ° in installing the product ° in daily maintenance ° in trouble
shooting ° Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
° 100% ° 80% ° 50% ° 0% ° Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
° Satisfied ° Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
° Print edition ° Electronic edition ° Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
° Very ° Somewhat ° Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
° Good ° Normal ° Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
° Yes
° No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
° Yes
° No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
° Yes (Please give an example)
° No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?
8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?
9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?
° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)
° Practical ° Unpractical (your advice)
10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?
° Beautiful ° Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:
Satisfied (please specify)
Unsatisfied (please specify)
12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:
Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at